COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00 11 13 - 1 NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN: That sealed bids will be received by College Community School District, at the College Community School District - ESC (Educational Services Center) at 401 76th Avenue SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404, until 2:00 p.m. on the 16th day of November, 2016. The bids will be opened shortly thereafter in the ESC Conference Room and publicly read by the owner. All bidders are welcome to attend. The project consists of furnishing the following supplies, equipment, and/or service. Board Approval of Contract shall be the at the scheduled board meeting on November 21st, 2016. COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION PROJECT NO. 14277001 The bids are for a single Prime Contract (civil, general, electrical combined for tennis courts and a parking lot expansion. Bids shall be on a lump sum basis; segregated sub-bids will not be accepted. Work is anticipated to commence upon award of contract, and be completed by June 2017 . A pre-bid conference is scheduled for November 2nd, 2016 at 2:00 p.m. in the College Community School District at 401 76th Avenue SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 . Plans and specifications governing the construction of the proposed Work have been prepared by OPN Architects, Inc of Cedar Rapids, Iowa. Bidders for the Contract may obtain a maximum of two copies of the Bidding Documents by contacting Rapids Reproductions, Cedar Rapids, IA Ph. 319-364 24 73 in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders upon depositing the sum of $100 (written to OPN Architects) or a MBI Plan Deposit card for each set of documents. All Bidders may Log On and register as a plan holder for this Project at www.isqft.com. Once bidders have registered and logged on, bidders can access bidding documents at no charge. Once logged onto the project though iSqFt, bidding documents may be downloaded, viewed and printed. iSqFt's technical support phone number is 1-877-502-9070. Documents may also be viewed at the following plan rooms: College Community District Website; www.prairiepride.org ph: 319-848-5200 Greater Fort Dodge Growth Alliance Planroom, 24 North 9th Street, Suite A, Ft. Dodge, IA, ph: 515-955-5500. Bid+Builders Exchange, 4814 E. Broadway, Madison, WI, ph: 608-221-3148 Des Moines Construction Update Plan Room; 221 Park Street, Des Moines, IA 50303; ph: 515.288.7339 Bid security in the amount of 5% of the total bid in the form of certified check, credit union share draft, or surety bond written on an original AIA Document A310, Bid Bond is required for this project. The successful bidder will be required to provide surety Performance and Payment Bonds in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum. The award of the contract may be made by College Community School Board to any responsible bidder or bidders offering suitable supplies, equipment and/or service at the lowest price taking into consideration
Transcript
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00 11 13 - 1
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN: That sealed bids will be received by College Community School District, atthe College Community School District - ESC (Educational Services Center) at 401 76th Avenue SW,Cedar Rapids, IA 52404, until 2:00 p.m. on the 16th day of November, 2016. The bids will be openedshortly thereafter in the ESC Conference Room and publicly read by the owner. All bidders are welcometo attend. The project consists of furnishing the following supplies, equipment, and/or service.
Board Approval of Contract shall be the at the scheduled board meeting on November 21st, 2016.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
PROJECT NO. 14277001
The bids are for a single Prime Contract (civil, general, electrical combined for tennis courts and a parkinglot expansion. Bids shall be on a lump sum basis; segregated sub-bids will not be accepted.
Work is anticipated to commence upon award of contract, and be completed by June 2017 .
A pre-bid conference is scheduled for November 2nd, 2016 at 2:00 p.m. in the College CommunitySchool District at 401 76th Avenue SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 .
Plans and specifications governing the construction of the proposed Work have been prepared by OPNArchitects, Inc of Cedar Rapids, Iowa.
Bidders for the Contract may obtain a maximum of two copies of the Bidding Documents by contactingRapids Reproductions, Cedar Rapids, IA Ph. 319-364 24 73 in accordance with the Instructions to Biddersupon depositing the sum of $100 (written to OPN Architects) or a MBI Plan Deposit card for each set ofdocuments.
All Bidders may Log On and register as a plan holder for this Project at www.isqft.com. Once bidders haveregistered and logged on, bidders can access bidding documents at no charge. Once logged onto theproject though iSqFt, bidding documents may be downloaded, viewed and printed. iSqFt's technicalsupport phone number is 1-877-502-9070.
Documents may also be viewed at the following plan rooms:
College Community District Website; www.prairiepride.org ph: 319-848-5200
Greater Fort Dodge Growth Alliance Planroom, 24 North 9th Street, Suite A, Ft. Dodge, IA, ph: 515-955-5500.
Bid+Builders Exchange, 4814 E. Broadway, Madison, WI, ph: 608-221-3148
Des Moines Construction Update Plan Room; 221 Park Street, Des Moines, IA 50303; ph: 515.288.7339
Bid security in the amount of 5% of the total bid in the form of certified check, credit union share draft, orsurety bond written on an original AIA Document A310, Bid Bond is required for this project. Thesuccessful bidder will be required to provide surety Performance and Payment Bonds in an amount equalto one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum.
The award of the contract may be made by College Community School Board to any responsible bidder orbidders offering suitable supplies, equipment and/or service at the lowest price taking into consideration
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00 11 13 - 2
the quality of materials or service in the best interest of the Owner. The right is reserved to reject any andall bids, or any part thereof, and to waive informalities, and to enter into such contract or contracts as shallbe deemed in the best interest of the Owner.
By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coalproduced within the State of Iowa.
By: James A. Rotter, Board Secretary
College Community School District
October 2016 in Cedar Rapids The Gazette
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT
(NOT TO SCALE)LOCATION MAP
DRAWINGS OF PROPOSED IMPROVEMENTS
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
NOTE
HALL AND HALL PROJECT NUMBER:CITY FILE NUMBER:
DRAW
ING
S O
F PR
OPO
SED
IMPR
OVEM
ENTS
FO
RTE
NNIS
CO
URTS
AND
PARKI
NG
LO
T EX
PANSIO
N
SHEET INDEX
C0.0
C2.0C3.0C3.1
C1.0
NO. DESCRIPTION
FOR
COVEREXISTING SITE SURVEY AND DEMOLITION PLANSITE LAYOUT AND UTILITY PLANSITE GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLANSITE GRADING AND EROSION CONTROL PLAN
CITY OF CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWAUTILITY AND EMERGENCY TELEPHONE NUMBERS
C4.0 GENERAL NOTES AND DETAILSC4.1 GENERAL NOTES AND DETAILSED1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - DEMO WORKE1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - NEW WORKE5.0 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILSE5.1 ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES AND DETAILS
1. PAVEMENT SECTION IN CUT AREAS-SUITABLE EXISTING SUBGRADE: CUT TO DESIGN SUBGRADE ELEVATION.
SCARIFY AND RECOMPACT THE TOP 12" TO 98% OF THE MATERIALS STANDARDPROCTOR DRY DENSITY.
-EXISTING EXPANSIVE SOIL OR UNSUITABLE SOIL: OVER-EXCAVATE 18", REPLACEWITH SUITABLE ON-SITE FILL MATERIAL OR STRUCTURAL FILL. COMPACT INACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS.
-EXISTING GRADE SHALL BE PROOF ROLLED WITH A FULLY LOADED TANDEMAXLE DUMP TRUCK PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF SUBBASE.
2. PAVEMENT SECTION IN FILL AREAS-SUITABLE EXISTING SUBGRADE: SCARIFY TO A DEPTH OF 8" AND RECOMPACT.
PRIOR TO PLACEMENT OF FILL, EXISTING GRADE SHALL BE PROOF ROLLED TOIDENTIFY AREAS OF SOFT OR UNSUITABLE MATERIAL.
- EXISTING EXPANSIVE OR UNSUITABLE SOIL: OVER-EXCAVATE MIN. 18", REPLACEWITH SUITABLE ON-SITE FILL MATERIAL OR STRUCTURAL FILL. COMPACT INACCORDANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS.
- PLACE AND COMPACT SUITABLE FILL MATERIAL IN ACCORDANCE WITH FILLSPECIFICATIONS. COMPACT MATERIAL TO 95% OF THE MATERIALS STANDARDPROCTOR DRY DENSITY, UNLESS WITHIN 1.0 FOOT OF FINAL SUBGRADE ELEVATION,THEN COMPACT MATERIAL TO 98% OF THE MATERIALS STANDARD PROCTOR DRYDENSITY.
POLE BASE MOW EDGE DETAIL (ADJACENT TO PAVEMENT)
BAD ELEVATION
HH
TO EXISTING LIGHTINGCONTACTOR, ED-3
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
EXISTING POLETO REMAIN
REMOVE ALL EXISTING CONDUCTORS FROMEXISTING CONDUIT AND ABANDON EXISTINGEMPTY CONDUIT UNDERGROUND, TYPICAL
EXISTING HANDHOLETO REMAIN
ED-1 ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-1 ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-1
ED-2
ED-2
ED-2
ED-2
ED-2
ED-2ED-2
ED-2
EXISTING PUSHBUTTONCONTROL, FOR EASTLIT COURTS, ED-2
REMOVE EXISTING PUSHBUTTONCONTROL, ED-2
WEST LIT COURTS
EAST LIT COURTS
PRAIRIE CREEK(JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL)
STADIUMCONCESSIONS
BUILDING
PRAIRIE HIGH SCHOOL
EXISTING UNDERGROUNDRACEWAY, TYPICAL
TO EXISTING LIGHTING CONTACTORLOCATED IN THE HIGH SCHOOL'S FIRSTFLOOR MECHANICAL ROOM C118.
1" = 40'-0"1 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN - DEMO WORK TO REMAIN
TO BE REMOVED /REVISED
DEMOLITION KEY
REFER TO SHEET E5.1 FORELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
NOTES
HH
HH
TC-2,4EX1 E-6
TC-6,8EX1 E-6
TC-14,16EX2 E-6
TC-10,12EX2 E-6
TC-26,28EX1 E-6
TC-30,32EX1 E-6
TC-22,24EX2 E-6
TC-18,20EX2 E-6
HH
1
NEW UNDERGROUND1"C, 2#8, 1#8 GRND
NEW UNDERGROUND1"C, 2#8, 1#8 GRND
NEW UNDERGROUND1"C, 2#8, 1#8 GRND
EXISTING POLE
EXISTING POLE
EXISTING POLE, REPLACEDAMAGED POLE BASE SHROUDAND ANY MISSING FASTENERSAS NEEDED, PAINT TO MATCH
EXISTING POLE EXISTING POLE, REPAIRELECTRICAL ACCESSCOVER, REPLACE ANYMISSING FASTENERSAS NEEDED
EXISTING POLE, REPLACE MISSINGELECTRICAL ACCESS COVER ANDANY MISSING FASTERNERS AS NEEDED,PAINT TO MATCH
EXISTING POLE
EXISTING POLE
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-1LSB E-2
E-4LSA E-2
E-4LSA E-2
E-4LSA E-2
EXISTING UNDERGROUNDRACEWAY, TYPICAL
DIRECTIONAL BORE UNDEREXISTING HARD SURFACES,1"C, 2#8, 1#10 GRND, TYPICAL
TO RELOCATED LIGHTING CONTACTORSIN STORAGE 385, REMAIN TIGHT TOSTRUCTURE AND ABOVE CEILINGSTHROUGHOUT CONDUIT PATH
EXISTING HANDHOLE
E-3
TO EXISTING LIGHTING CONTACTORLOCATED IN THE HIGH SCHOOL'S FIRSTFLOOR MECHANICAL ROOM C118.
NEW PUSHBUTTON CONTROLS LOCATION,TO CONTROL WEST LIT COURTS, E-7
NEW PUSHBUTTON CONTROLS LOCATION,TO CONTROL EAST LIT COURTS, E-7
PROVIDE NEW UNDERGROUND 1 1/2"C FOR- 16#8 FOR SPORTS LIGHTS- 1#8 FOR GROUNDINGAND NEW UNDERGROUND 1"C FOR- 4#12 FOR CONTROLS- 6#10 FOR RECEPTACLES- 1#10 FOR GROUNDING
NEW UNDERGROUND 1 1/4"C- 4#8 FOR SPORTS LIGHTS- 2#12 FOR CONTROLS- 2#10 FOR RECEPTACLES- 1#8 FOR GROUNDING
WEST LIT COURTS EAST LIT COURTS
NEW UNDERGROUND 1 1/4"C- 4#8 FOR SPORTS LIGHTS- 2#10 FOR RECEPTACLES- 1#8 FOR GROUNDING
NEW UNDERGROUND 1 1/4"C- 4#8 FOR SPORTS LIGHTS- 2#12 FOR CONTROLS- 2#10 FOR RECEPTACLES- 1#8 FOR GROUNDING
CIRCUIT TC-1, E-8
E5.0
2
CIRCUIT TC-1, E-8
CIRCUIT TC-3, E-8
CIRCUIT TC-3, E-8
CIRCUIT TC-5, E-8
CIRCUIT TC-5, E-8
E1.0
2
E5.0
3
PRAIRIE HIGH SCHOOL
PRAIRIE CREEK(JUNIOR HIGH SCHOOL)
STADIUMCONCESSIONS
BUILDING
LB CONDUITS INTO BUILDING LOWON WALL INTO NEW CHASE WALL.WEATHER TIGHT SEAL EXTERIORPENETRATIONS, TYPICAL
ROUTE CONDUITS WITHIN NEW CHASE WALLUP TO THE CEILING SPACE, REMAIN TIGHTTO WALL CORNER. TURN CONDUITS ABOVETHE CLASSROOM'S CEILING, REMAIN TIGHTTO STRUCTURE.
REFER TO THE "ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN -NEW WORK" FOR CONTINUATION
REFER TO THE "ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN -NEW WORK" FOR CONTINUATION
NEW CHASE WALL IS TO BE 5/8” TYPE X GWBON OUTSIDE FACE OF 3 5/8” METAL FRAMING.MINIMIZE THE FRAMING IN THE CORNER TOTHE SMALLEST AMOUNT EASILY CONSTRUCTED(12” X 12” MAX.) TOP OF GYPSUM BOARD ISHELD 6” ABOVE FINISHED CEILING. ADD 4” VINYLBASE (TO MATCH EXISTING) AT FLOOR. FINISHAND PAINT WALL TO MATCH EXISTING.
Coordinate ceiling mounted devices with Reflected Ceiling Plan
SWITCHING
(Blank) - Indicates standard switch2 - Indicates 2 pole switch3 - Indicates 3 way switch4 - Indicates 4 way switchP/L - Indicates pilot lightK - Indicates keyed switchWP - Indicates receptacle with weatherproof box/flipcover+##" - Dimension indicates height to center of switch above finish floor (+46" if not shown)"x" - Lowercase letter indicates switching schemeM - Indicates momentary switch
CIRCUIT DATA:PANEL NAME-CIRCUIT NUMBER (XXXX-###)OR CIRCUIT NOTE (E-#)
H-1 Piping demolition and relocation shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor.
Electrical contractor shall coordinate this work as required to maintain code clearances
around all electrical gear.
H-2 Remove existing piping from above new panel locations and install new type M copper
condensate lines attached to the existing. Piping shall be insulated with 1" fiberglass. Route
piping down in corner to existing floor drain and maintain all code required clearances.
RELOCATED TIMECLOCK
RELOCATED TENNIS LIGHTINGCONTACTORS
TO RELOCATED TENNIS COURTLIGHTS, SEE PLANS FOR SIZE,QUANTITIES, AND LOCATIONS
TO EXISTING TRANSFORMER / MDP1LOCATED ON LOWER FLOOR
UPPER FLOOR
1 1/4"C, 4#3, 1#8 GRND
NOTE 1
CREEK ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC RISER DIAGRAM NOTES
1. Provide a General Electric 22,000 AIC rated 100A/3P breaker to feed Panel Tennis. Breaker rearrangement will be required to create space for 3 pole breaker.
a. Refer to specification 265000 for additional requirements.
b. Provide a minimum 5 year warranty on all LED products 20W and greater.
c. Dimming ballast/driver shall be compatible with the lighting control system.
2. New LSB type light fixtures is to be mounted on the existing poles indicated on the plans. Drill new mounting holes as needed.
3. Contractor to coordinate the fixture mounting holes to match the offsets on the field drilled holes of fixture type LSB. All new pole finishes shall match the existing pole finishes.
Refer to detail E551-02a for pole base information.
4. Use the existing circuit to wire each fixture to be at full light output when energized. For future use, each fixture shall have the capability to to be rewired for 50% step dimming (i.e. Hi/Lo).
5. Two of the four heads are fed through separate contactor/circuit.
6. Relamp and clean existing fixtures prior to completion. Refer to detail E551-02b for pole base information.
HAND HOLE SCHEDULE
PLAN COVER QUAZITE EQUIVALENT
MARK SIZE IDENTIFICATION CATALOG NO. MANUFACTURERS
HH-1 12" x 18" Electrical PC1218CA17/BA12 New Bases, HiLine, Armorcast
GENERAL ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
1. Unless noted otherwise all items to be removed and disposed of by Contractor. See demolition key. The Owner may elect to salvage select electrical system
components. Coordinate with Owner prior to disposal of equipment.
2. Electrical demolition drawings are based on field observation and existing documentation where available. Extensive efforts have been made to accurately portray
existing conditions. Demolition drawings are intended to convey the general scope of demolition. Miscellaneous abandoned boxes and conduit may not be indicated.
All electrical and communications systems, raceways and supports in walls and ceilings scheduled to be removed are to be demolished. Contractor field verification is
required.
3. Maintain integrity of existing circuit wiring serving areas outside the remodel area. If specific items/devices are taken out of service temporarily to complete new work,
return to service as soon as possible. Coordinate any service outages affecting areas outside the remodel area with Owner at least 24 hours prior to outage. Where
required by the Owner, any work requiring power interruption shall be scheduled outside of normal working hours.
4. The building will remain occupied and in use for the duration of construction. Refer to the specifications as well as phasing plans for additional information regarding
working access within and adjacent to occupied areas and specific phasing requirements.
GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES:
1. Below is a list of common requirements outlined in the Project Manual. Refer to the Project Manual and standard details for more detailed information for these items
and for all other materials and construction methods required.
a. Minimum wire size to be #12 for power.
b. All conduits, junction boxes, wiring, equipment, etc. to be properly labeled.
c. Provide green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system.
2. Drawings are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work, and to indicate the general locations of equipment and some feeders. Contractor shall field
verify all dimensions and layout his own work according to the following guidelines:
a. Contractor shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of feeders prior to construction so as to
best fit the layout of the work.
b. Contractor shall install equipment per clearances listed in NEC.
3. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. All work shall be
performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft.
4. Penetrations for all conduits passing through fire and smoke rated walls and floors shall be provided with firestopping to maintain the fire rating. Use other 3M (or equal)
UL-Listed details as applicable for specific installations.
5. Coordinate installation of all items penetrating the exterior building envelope with General Contractor. All penetrations shall be weather tight. Interiors of conduits shall
be sealed with duct seal.
6. Electrical Contractor shall remove and reinstall acoustical ceiling tile (ACT) as required to complete electrical work as indicated on the plans. Any tile damaged during
construction shall be replaced at the contractor's expense.
7. Provide updated typewritten circuit directories at all existing panelboards with new or modified circuits.
8. The building will remain occupied and in use for the duration of construction. Contractor shall maintain all circuits in occupied areas. Any work requiring power
interruption to occupied areas shall be scheduled with the Owner. After-hours work may be required.
ELECTRICAL NOTES:
E-1 Install new LSB light fixture head on the existing pole and connect to the existing lighting circuit. Refer to the light fixture schedule for more information.
E-2 New parking lot fixtures shall use the existing lighting control contactor located in the High School's first floor mechanical room C118. The existing lighting contactor is
served from existing DP-H3 also located in mechanical room C118.
E-3 Intercept existing circuit serving the existing parking lot and extend circuit to new pole locations per plans.
E-4 Connect to existing circuit serving the parking lot. Refer to the light fixture schedule for more information.
E-5 Relocated tennis court lighting contactors and timeclock controls circuit shall be fed from new panel TC.
E-6 Relocated tennis court sports lighting shall be controlled through the relocated contactor and timeclock controls. Pushbuttons shown on plans shall turn the lights on for
a period of time designated by the relocated timers. See plans for the two control zones ("West Lit Courts" and "East Lit Courts").
E-7 Reinstall new weather tight pushbutton for tennis court lighting controls in the existing opening. Use the existing backbox and provide new faceplate gaskets and seals
to weatherproof to an IP66 rating. Provide 120V controls circuit from 20A/1P spare breaker in new panel TC.
E-8 Reinstall new weather resistant ground fault circuit interrupting receptacles in a new diecast weatherproof enclosure. Use existing opening on pole and provide new
faceplate gaskets and seals.
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
ED-1 Remove existing light fixture head on the existing pole. Existing pole and circuit conductors shall remain for new installations. Refer to new work plans.
ED-2 Carefully remove existing tennis court lights/poles in its entirety to not damage existing pole/luminaires/controls. Remove the two existing pushbuttons from its existing
back box located on the pole (back boxes are to be reused on new work). Existing sports lights will be reinstalled as part of new work. Refer to new work plans for
locations and additional information.
ED-3 Carefully remove the existing lighting contactor and timeclock serving the existing tennis court lights. The existing lighting contactor and timeclock will be reinstalled as
part of new work. Refer to new work plans for its location and additional information.
ED-4 Remove existing receptacles and faceplates. See new work for replacement.
XX
# #
CIRCUIT BREAKER, NUMBERDENOTES TRIP RATING
30A
FUSE
SPECIAL CABINET AS NOTED - SURFACE MOUNTED
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
NEW SURFACE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD
SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCH
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
*** EQUIPMENT ***
SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE
ANY WIRING DEVICE WITH THIS SYMBOLINDICATES SURFACE MOUNTED OUTLET BOX
PUSHBUTTON
SINGLE POLE WALL SWITCH
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
*** WIRING DEVICES ***
*** SCHEMATIC RISER DIAGRAM ***
SAFETY SWITCH/MOTOR DISCONNECT
M METER
PULL BOXPB
FEEDER INSTALLATION - LINE VOLTAGE
PANEL OR AS NOTED
E
GROUND
SPECIAL CABINET AS NOTED - RECESSED MOUNTED
EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION PER EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
TRANSFORMER
DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
T
POLE AND LUMINAIRE, ARROW INDICATES AIMING
POLE AND TWO LUMINAIRE, ARROWS INDICATE AIMING
(NOTE: ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN MAY NOT BE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROJECT)
ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS
FIXTURE - WALL MOUNTED
*** LIGHTING FIXTURES ***
CEILING FIXTURE
GROUND
HOME RUN TO PANELBOARD - NUMBER OFARROWS INDICATE NUMBER OF CIRCUITS
*** RACEWAYS ***
CONDUIT TURNING UP
CONDUIT TURNING DOWN
CONDUIT STUB
FLOOD LIGHT - GROUND MOUNTED
BOLLARD ON CONCRETE BASE
FLOOD LIGHT - IN GROUND
CONDUIT CONTINUATION
STRIP FIXTURE
STRIP FIXTURE - WALL MOUNTED
CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING
CONDUIT CONCEALED IN FLOOR OR UNDERGROUND
SURFACE RACEWAY - CONDUIT UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
SPLICE CONNECTION FROM EXISTING TO NEW
EQUIPMENT CONNECTION - WALL MOUNTEDE
EXISTING SURFACE BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD OR AS NOTED
FEEDER INSTALLATION - LOW VOLTAGE
XX NEW FEEDER/CONDUIT PER SCHEDULE
POLE POLE MOUNTED SPORTS LIGHT FIXTURES
REFER TO LIGHT FIXTURESCHEDULE FOR POLE HEIGHT
~2'-6" MATCH EXISTING POLEBASES INDICATED ON PLANS
6'-0"
SONOTUBE FORM
POLE
ADAPTER AS REQ'D
1'-6"
5/8"X8'GROUND ROD
CONDUIT AS REQ'DBURY 24"
FLUSH HANDHOLEAND COVER
4#5 REBAR
#3 TIES AT 12" O.C.
CONDUIT IN CONCRETE
UNDISTURBED EARTH
FINISHED GRADE
EXPOSED CONCRETETO HAVE RUBBED FINISH
ANCHOR BOLTSW/ BASE COVER
BASE DETAILFIXTURE TYPE
LSA
E551-02a
CONNECT TOGROUND LUG
1"C EMPTY,FOR FUTURE
BASE AND WIRING BY E.C.
TRENCH DETAILFOR NON-HARD SURFACE AREA
E551-07
COMPACTED BACKFILL
24"
FEEDER
EARTH/GRASS
WARNING TAPE
6'-0"
SONOTUBE FORM
2'-0"
4#5 REBAR
#3 TIES AT 12" O.C.
UNDISTURBED EARTH
FINISHED GRADE
BASE DETAILFIXTURE TYPES
EX1 AND EX2
E551-02b
PROVIDE NEW ANCHOR BOLTSWITH EXISTING BASE COVER
EXISTING RELOCATED POLEAND FIXTURES HEADS
EXPOSED NEW CONCRETETO HAVE RUBBED FINISH,FLUSH WITH COURTS
CONDUIT INCONCRETE
BASE AND WIRING BY E.C.
CONNECT TOGROUND LUG
CONDUIT AS REQ'DBURY 24"
5/8"X8'GROUND ROD
REFER TO LIGHT FIXTURESCHEDULE FOR APPROXIMATEEXISTING POLE HEIGHT
Project Specifications Project Number: 14277001 October 25, 2016
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
INCORPORATED 200 FIFTH AVENUE SE SUITE 201 CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA 52401 (319) 363-6018 FAX: (319) 363-7349 Set Number:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT OPN PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 01 02 PROJECT INFORMATION 2 00 11 10 NOTICE OF HEARING 2 00 11 13 NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2 00 22 13 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4 00 22 15 SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 2 00 25 13 PRE-BID CONFERENCE 2 00 41 13 BID FORM 2 00 43 13 SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 2 00 44 14 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 4 00 52 00 AGREEMENT FORM 2 00 61 13 BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 2 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 2 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 10 00 73 10 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 2 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 2 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 6 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 8 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 4 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 4 01 42 16 DEFINITIONS 2 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 4 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4 01 70 00 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 12 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 6 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 4 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 2 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 11 68 23 TENNIS EQUIPMENT 2 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 26 00 10 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 8 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4 26 05 33 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 4 26 51 00 LIGHTING 4 DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 4 31 22 00 GRADING 4 31 23 16 EXCAVATION 2 31 23 23 FILL 6 31 23 33 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT OPN PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 4 32 12 16.13 ASPHALT COURT PAVING 4 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 18 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 2 32 18 23 TENNIS COURT SURFACING 6 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 6 32 93 00 PLANTS 10 DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES 33 41 00 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 6 33 46 00 SUBDRAINAGE 4
TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PROJECT INFORMATION 00 01 02 - 1
SECTION 00 01 02 - PROJECT INFORMATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A. Project Name: Tennis Courts, College Community School District, Cedar Rapids, Iowa..
B. Project Number: 14277001.
C. The Owner, hereinafter referred to as Owner: College Community School District.
D. Owner's Project Representative: Jim Rotter, Executive Director of Business Services.
1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION
A. Project Description: This project consists of new tennis courts.
1.03 PROJECT DESIGN TEAM
A. Architect: OPN Architects, Inc. 200 Fifth Avenue SE, Suite 201 Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401 (319)363-6018 Contact: Joe Tursi. E-mail: [email protected]
B. Electrical Engineer: Design Engineers, P.C. 8801 Prairie View Ln. SW Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52404 (319) 841-1944 Contact: Jonathan Gettler E-mail: [email protected]
C. Civil Engineer: Hall & Hall Engineers, Inc. 1860 Boyson Road Hiawatha, Iowa 52233 (313)362-9548 Contact: Brent Jackman E-mail: [email protected]
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PROJECT INFORMATION 00 01 02 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
NOTICE OF HEARING 00 11 10 - 1
SECTION 00 11 10 - NOTICE OF HEARING
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT
You are hereby notified that at 6:30 p.m., local time, on November 21st, 2016, in the CollegeCommunity Schools District (Education Services Center) Board Room at 401 76th Avenue SW,Cedar Rapids, IA 52404, there will be a public hearing as provided under Section 73A.3 of theCode of Iowa for the purpose of hearing or receiving any objections to the adoption of theproposed drawings, specifications and form of contract, and the proposed cost for the furnishingof all necessary labor, material, and equipment for:
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
for
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT
Proposed drawings, specifications, and form of contract may be examined at the CollegeCommunity School District ESC (Education Services Center) Board Room at 401 76th AvenueSW, Cedar Rapids, IA and at OPN Architects, Inc., 500 5th Avenue SE, Cedar Rapids, IA, from8:00 A.M. to 4:00 P.M.
Published upon order of James A. Rotter, Board Secretary.
PUBLISH:
October 2016 in the Cedar Rapids Gazette
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
NOTICE OF HEARING 00 11 10 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00 11 13 - 1
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN: That sealed bids will be received by College Community School District, atthe College Community School District - ESC (Educational Services Center) at 401 76th Avenue SW,Cedar Rapids, IA 52404, until 2:00 p.m. on the 16th day of November, 2016. The bids will be openedshortly thereafter in the ESC Conference Room and publicly read by the owner. All bidders are welcometo attend. The project consists of furnishing the following supplies, equipment, and/or service.
Board Approval of Contract shall be the at the scheduled board meeting on November 21st, 2016.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
PROJECT NO. 14277001
The bids are for a single Prime Contract (civil, general, electrical combined for tennis courts and a parkinglot expansion. Bids shall be on a lump sum basis; segregated sub-bids will not be accepted.
Work is anticipated to commence upon award of contract, and be completed by June 2017 .
A pre-bid conference is scheduled for November 2nd, 2016 at 2:00 p.m. in the College CommunitySchool District at 401 76th Avenue SW, Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 .
Plans and specifications governing the construction of the proposed Work have been prepared by OPNArchitects, Inc of Cedar Rapids, Iowa.
Bidders for the Contract may obtain a maximum of two copies of the Bidding Documents by contactingRapids Reproductions, Cedar Rapids, IA Ph. 319-364 24 73 in accordance with the Instructions to Biddersupon depositing the sum of $100 (written to OPN Architects) or a MBI Plan Deposit card for each set ofdocuments.
All Bidders may Log On and register as a plan holder for this Project at www.isqft.com. Once bidders haveregistered and logged on, bidders can access bidding documents at no charge. Once logged onto theproject though iSqFt, bidding documents may be downloaded, viewed and printed. iSqFt's technicalsupport phone number is 1-877-502-9070.
Documents may also be viewed at the following plan rooms:
College Community District Website; www.prairiepride.org ph: 319-848-5200
Greater Fort Dodge Growth Alliance Planroom, 24 North 9th Street, Suite A, Ft. Dodge, IA, ph: 515-955-5500.
Bid+Builders Exchange, 4814 E. Broadway, Madison, WI, ph: 608-221-3148
Des Moines Construction Update Plan Room; 221 Park Street, Des Moines, IA 50303; ph: 515.288.7339
Bid security in the amount of 5% of the total bid in the form of certified check, credit union share draft, orsurety bond written on an original AIA Document A310, Bid Bond is required for this project. Thesuccessful bidder will be required to provide surety Performance and Payment Bonds in an amount equalto one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Sum.
The award of the contract may be made by College Community School Board to any responsible bidder orbidders offering suitable supplies, equipment and/or service at the lowest price taking into consideration
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
NOTICE TO BIDDERS 00 11 13 - 2
the quality of materials or service in the best interest of the Owner. The right is reserved to reject any andall bids, or any part thereof, and to waive informalities, and to enter into such contract or contracts as shallbe deemed in the best interest of the Owner.
By virtue of statutory authority, preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coalproduced within the State of Iowa.
By: James A. Rotter, Board Secretary
College Community School District
October 2016 in Cedar Rapids The Gazette
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 1
SECTION 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
American Institute of Architects Document A701 - 1997, Instructions to Bidders, is hereby incorporated inthis specification by reference and is available from the Architect: OPN Architects, Inc., 200 Fifth AvenueSE, Suite 201, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401. The Instructions to Bidders, including modifications andspecial instructions, shall apply to all Bidders and Sub-Bidders.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 13 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 22 13 - 1
SECTION 00 22 13 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "Instructions to Bidders", AIADocument A701, 1997 Edition. Where any Article of the Instructions is modified or any Paragraph,Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unalteredprovisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
ARTICLE 3: BIDDING DOCUMENTS
1. Paragraph 3.1 Copies
A. Sub-paragraph 3.1.1; delete this paragraph and add the following: 3.1.1 All Bidders may obtain complete printed sets of the Bidding Documents from the
issuing office designated in the Notice to Bidders in the number and for the deposit sumstated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid andreturn the Bidding Documents in good condition within fourteen days after award ofContract. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deductedfrom the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documentsand the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded.
B. Sub-paragraph 3.1.2; delete the paragraph and add the following:1. "3.1.2 A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents."
2. Paragraph 3.2 Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents
A. Sub-paragraph 3.2.2; add the following: "An ambiguity, inconsistency, or error discovered too late to be clarified or interpreted by
Addendum shall be handled in the following manner: .1 The Bidder or Sub-bidder shall promptly notify the Architect. .2 The Bidder or Sub-bidder shall determine, to the best of his ability, the proper
methods or materials required to fulfill the design intent of the Architect and shallinclude the cost of providing such methods or materials in this Bid or Sub-bid.
.3 The Bidder or Sub-bidder shall submit with the Bid, as supplemental information,descriptions of the ambiguity, inconsistency, or error and the methods or materialswhich he has included in the Bid.
.4 The Owner and Architect will review the supplemental information prior toawarding the Contract."
3. Paragraph 3.3 Substitutions
A. Sub-paragraph 3.3.2; add the following: ".1 All substitution requests shall be submitted on the Substitution Request Form
included in the Project Specification Manual. All substitution requests submitted must becomplete with all requested information. Incomplete forms and requests submitted onother forms shall be disregarded.”
ARTICLE 4: BIDDING PROCEDURES
1. Paragraph 4.1 Preparation of Bids
A. Sub-paragraph 4.1.1; add the following sentence: "Bidders shall include the original copy of the Bid in the submittal envelope."
B. Add the following sub-paragraphs: "4.1.8 All apprentices working on the project shall be registered with an apprenticeship
program that is approved by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship Training,and registered with the City of Cedar Rapids. All of the information shall be supplied to theOwner. Bidders will not be diqualified from bidding if their apprenticeships are notregistered with the entities above.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 22 13 - 2
4.1.9 Out-of-State bidders shall furnish documentation prior to execution of the Agreementthat confirms the Bidder is in compliance with Chapter 91C Construction Contractors andChapter 490 Business Corporation Division XV Foreign Corporations of the Code of Iowa.
2. Paragraph 4.2 Bid Security
A. Sub-paragraph 4.2.4; add the following: "4.2.4 Bid Security in the amount of 5% of the Bid shall be presented as:
.1 A certified check on a solvent Iowa bank, made payable to the Owner; or, .2 A surety bond from a surety company authorized to do business in the state of
Iowa; or .3 A certified share draft on a solvent Iowa credit union, made payable to the
Owner."
3. Paragraph 4.3 Submission of Bids
A. Sub-paragraph 4.3.1; delete this paragraph and add the following: "4.3.1 Bids, required submittals, and supplementary information shall be presented in two
separate sealed opaque envelopes identified with the Project title, the Bidder's name, anda list of the con-tents. The contents of the envelopes shall be as follows: .1 Envelope No. One shall contain the original copy of the Bid. .2 Envelope No. Two shall contain the Bid Security and supplemental information
offered by the Bidder. Both envelopes shall be sealed in a mailing envelope addressed to the party receiving the
Bids and identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, ifapplicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. The mailingenvelope shall be noted "SEALED BID ENCLOSED".
B. Sub-paragraph 4.3.5; add the following: "4.3.5 Bids shall remain in force and effect for thirty (30) days after opening of the Bid.
ARTICLE 6: POST-BID INFORMATION
Sub-paragraph 6.3.1; delete “as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents” andinsert “within three (3) business days.”
ARTICLE 7: PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
1. Paragraph 7.1 Bond Requirements
A. Sub-paragraph 7.1.1; delete this paragraph and add the following: "7.1.1 The Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract
and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder in an amount equal to the totalContract Sum. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources. The cost ofthe Bonds shall be included in the Bid."
B. Sub-paragraph 7.1.2; delete this paragraph.
ARTICLE 9: WARRANTY EXTENSION
1. Paragraph 9.1 Correction of Work after Substantial Completion; add the following:
A. The Bidder shall be required to extend the one-year warranty period called out in Paragraph12.2.2 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction by one year, resulting in a twoyear period from the date of Substantial Completion where he will be required to correctdeficiencies in materials and workmanship and non-conforming work. The cost of the extensionshall be included in the Bid.”
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 22 13 - 3
ARTICLE 10: SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS
1. Paragraph 10.1 Reference
A. "10.1 Reference; add the following1. All references to provisions in Article 10 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders are
hereby trans-ferred to Section 00120 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. Anymodifications stated in Section 00120 shall have the same force and effect as if stated inArticle 10."
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 22 13 - 4
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 00 22 15 - 1
SECTION 00 22 15 - SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS
Special Instructions to bidders, as herein stated, are hereby incorporated in this specification. The SpecialInstructions shall apply to all Bidders and Sub-bidders.
1. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY: "Bidder agrees that if awarded contract to supply any partof the above material, bidder will not engage in any discriminatory employment practices based onrace, color, religion, sexual orientation or national origin and that they will in all contracts comply withall statutes of the State of Iowa against discrimination. Failure to do so could be deemed a materialbreach of contract.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS 00 22 15 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRE-BID CONFERENCE 00 25 13 - 1
SECTION 00 25 13 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE
Prior to submission of Bids, a conference will be held for all bidders and sub-bidders considering a bid onthe CCSD Tennis Courts and Parking Lot Expansion project to review the general requirements andanswer questions regarding the project. The conference will be held at ESC (Educational Service Center)Board Room on November 2nd, 2016 at 2:00 p.m.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRE-BID CONFERENCE 00 25 13 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
BID FORM 00 41 13 - 1
SECTION 00 41 13 - BID FORM
Bids for construction contracts must be submitted on a copy of the attached bid form.
TO: ________________________________, herein called "Owner"
1. In compliance with the Advertisement for Bids and the proposed Contract Documents relating to the:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
Project Number: 14277001
including Addenda __________, __________, __________, __________.___________
the undersigned hereby proposes and agrees to fully perform the Work within the time statedand in strict accordance with the proposed Contract Documents dated June 15, 2016, includingfurnishing labor and/or materials, and to do all of the work required to construct and completesaid Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as follows:
For complete Construction as described in the Bidding Documents:
UNIT PRICES: Bidder agrees to add to the Contract Sum the following unit prices. If quantitiesincluded in the Base Bid as indicated in the Contract Documents vary from the base amount.
UNIT PRICE NO. 1: Remove unsatisfactory subgrade materials and replace with imported
general fill.: Unit of Measure: Dollars per cubic yard. UNIT ADD PRICE: ($ _______________ )
2. I understand that the Owner reserves the right to reject this Bid, but that this Bid shall remain openand not be withdrawn for a period of thirty days form the date of the Bid Opening.
3. Notice of acceptance, or request for additional information, may be addressed to the undersigned atthe address set forth below.
4. I agree to complete the work within the schedule of completion stated in the Bidding Documents.
Note: If bidder is a corporation, set forth the legal name of the corporation together with the signature ofthe officer or officers authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the corporation. If bidder is a partnership,set forth the name of the firm together with the signature of the partner or partners authorized to signcontracts on behalf of the partnership.
BUSINESS ADDRESS:_______________________________________________________________
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00 43 13 - 1
SECTION 00 43 13 - SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
In accordance with the Instructions to Bidders and Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, submit thefollowing forms:
1. Bid Security: A certified check, a surety bond written on an original AIA Document A310, Bid Bond,Current Edition, or a certified share draft. The Bid Security shall be in an amount to cover fivepercent (5%) of the total bid amount (including all Add Alternates).
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS 00 43 13 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 44 14 - 1
SECTION 00 44 14 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
Project: College Community Tennis Courts and Parking Lot Expansion
We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the aboveproject:
Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposedsubstitution will require for its proper installation. Failure to fully complete this form is basis to notaccept this Substitution Request.
Submit, with request, all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality andperformance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality inperformance.
CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUALPERFORMANCE
The undersigned states that the function, appearance, and quality are equivalent or superior to thespecified item.
Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure toprovide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval.
B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailingcosts caused by the requested substitution? Yes __________ No __________
If no, fully explain: ____________________________________________________________
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 44 14 - 4
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00 - 1
SECTION 00 52 00 - AGREEMENT FORM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 FORM OF AGREEMENT
A. American Institute of Architects Document A101-2007, Standard Form of Agreement BetweenOwner and Contractor, is hereby incorporated by reference in this specification and is availablefrom the Architect: OPN Architects, Inc., 200 Fifth Avenue SE, Suite 201, Cedar Rapids, Iowa. Itshall be the Agreement for the Work.
END OF AGREEMENT
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
AGREEMENT FORM 00 52 00 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00 61 13 - 1
SECTION 00 61 13 - BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
American Institute of Architects Document A312, Performance Bond and Labor and Material PaymentBond, December, 1984, and Document G715–1991, Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate ofInsurance 25-S, 2001 Edition, or ACCORD form 25-S, shall be submitted to fulfill the requirements of theBidding Documents. All submittals shall be on original forms with original signatures.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES 00 61 13 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 1
SECTION 00 72 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. American Institute of Architects Document A201 - 2007, General Conditions of the Contract forConstruction, is hereby incorporated in this specification by reference and is available from theArchitect: OPN Archtiects, Inc., 200 Fifth Avenue SE, Suite 201, Cedar Rapids, Iowa. The GeneralConditions, including modifications and special conditions shall apply to all contractors andsubcontractors.
END OF DOCUMENT
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 72 00 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 1
SECTION 00 73 00 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contractfor Construction", AIA Document A201 - 2007. Where any article of the General Conditions is modified orany paragraph, subparagraph, or clause thereof is modified or deleted by these SupplementaryConditions, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain ineffect.
ARTICLE 2 – OWNER
1. Paragraph 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner
A. Sub-paragraph 2.2.3: Add the following to the end of paragraph: "The Contractor shall compare information furnished by the Owner (including surveys and
soil tests with observable physical conditions) and the Contract Documents and on thebasis of such review, shall report to the Owner and Architect any conflicts, errors oromissions."
2. Paragraph 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner
A. Sub-paragraph 2.2.5: Delete and add the following: "2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, 10 copies of Drawings and Project
Manuals for execution of Work. Costs for copies of drawings and Project Manuals inexcess of this number shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.”
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACTOR
1. Paragraph 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor
A. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 3.2.1 "The Contractor also represents that all Contract Documents for the Project have been
examined; including those intended for work of trades not normally performed by theContractor’s own forces, and has become thoroughly familiar with all conditions which maypertain to or affect the Work under the Contract."
2. Paragraph 3.4 Labor and Materials
A. Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 3.4.1: "Work required by the Contract Documents to be performed after working hours or work
the Contractor elects to perform after hours shall be completed at no additional cost to theOwner.”
B. Add Sub-subparagraph 3.4.3.1 to Sub-paragraph 3.4.3: "The Contractor (Company) shall not be owned, operated, or managed by a registered sex
offender who has been convicted of a sex offense against a minor in accordance with IowaCode 692A.113. In addition, the Contractor shall not permit an employee, Subcontractor(Company) owned, operated, or managed by, or Subcontractor employee who is aregistered sex offender convicted of a sex offense against a minor on real property of theschools of the Owner in accordance with Iowa Code 692A.113. The Contractor shallfurther acknowledge and certify services provided under this Contract comply with IowaCode 692A.113.
3. Add new Paragraph 3.4.4 as follows:
A. "Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of inconvenience to andinterruption of the Owner’s operations. Any and all interruptions of the operations of the Ownernecessary for the performance of the Work shall be noted in the progress schedule and theContractor shall additionally give the Owner sufficient advance notice of such interruption as toallow the Owner to adjust operations accordingly. Contractor’s failure to give the Owner timely
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 2
notice of such intentions shall place the responsibility of any resulting delays or additional costssolely with the Contractor.”
4. Paragraph 3.6 Taxes
A. Sub-paragraph 3.6.1: Change to the following:1. "3.6.1 This Project is Exempt from all Iowa Sales Tax. In accordance with provisions of
the Code of Iowa and of the Iowa Administrative Rules, “Iowa Construction Sales TaxExemption Certificate” will be issued for this project. A copy of that certificate and a “Letterof Authorization” will be provided to the successful bidder pursuant to Iowa Code Sections422.42 (15) & (16), and 422.47 (5). The general contractor and all of his sub-contractors,who have been identified at or before filing of the Performance Bond, are duly authorizedto purchase building materials for this project without the payment of Iowa Sales Tax. Allcontractors associated with this project are advised to keep accurate records of their taxexempt purchases that pertain to this project in case they are audited by the IowaDepartment of Revenue and Finance. For additional information regarding this TaxExempt Status, go to http://www.state.ia.us/tax/locgov/locgov.html. A copy of the IowaContractors Guide is also available at http://www.state.ia.us/tax/educate/78527.html whichfurther explains this exempt status. This exemption applies only to Iowa Sales tax anddoes not exempt the contractor’s obligations for other state or federal requirements andtaxes such as social security taxes, unemployment taxes, withholding, etc.”
B. Add Sub-paragraphs 3.6.2 and 3.6.3: "3.6.2 At or before the time the Performance Bond is filed, Contractor shall provide a listing
to the Owner identifying all subcontractors. Contractor and subcontractors may makecopies of the exemption certificate and shall provide, at the time of purchase, a copy of thetax exemption certificate to each supplier providing construction material for the Project. The Contractor or subcontractors may then purchase from the suppliers building materialsfor the project under this Contract free from sales tax.
3.6.3. The Contractor and subcontractors shall be responsible for keeping recordsidentifying the property purchased exempt from tax and verifying that the propertypurchased was used in this contract with this Owner. Any property purchased tax- freeand not used in this contract is subject to tax which must be paid directly to the IowaDepartment of Revenue and Finance.”
5. Paragraph 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws
A. Sub-paragraph 3.7.4: Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions; add the following beforethe last line: "Failure to properly register a claim within the 21 day period shall be grounds fordenial of the claim."
B. Sub-paragraph 3.7.5: Modify by adding the underlined words so that the section now reads asfollows:1. "3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor knowingly encounters and recognizes
human remains, burial markers, archeological sites or previously undelineated wetlandsnot indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend anyoperations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receiptof such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmentalauthorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspendsuch operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all otheroperations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in theContract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence or good faith belief of suchexistence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.
6. Add Sub-paragraph 3.7.6:
A. “The Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections related to the performance of its workand ensuring work is complete for inspections. Any costs associated with reinspection caused
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 3
by irregularities, deficiencies or non-conforming work will be borne by the responsible contractorincluding all Architectural and Engineering Services related to evaluation of the problem anddevelopment of an acceptable solution.”
7. Paragraph 3.10 Contractor’s Construction Schedules
A. Refer to Sub-paragraph 3.10.1 in the last sentence after “Work and Project,” add the followingtext before the word “shall….” "or as requested by the Owner or Architect”
8. Paragraph 3.10.2; delete the last sentence in this paragraph.
A. Sub-paragraph 4.2.4; delete and add the following:1. "4.2.4.1 All notices, demands, requests, instructions, approvals, proposals and claims
must be in writing. Any notice or demand upon the Contractor shall be sufficiently given ifdelivered at the office of the Contractor stated on the signature page of the agreement (orat such other office as the contractor may from time to time designate in writing to theOwner), or if deposited in the United States mail in a sealed, postage-paid envelope ordelivered with charges prepaid to any telegraph company for transportation, in each caseaddressed to such office."
2. "4.2.4.2 All papers required to be delivered to the Owner shall, unless otherwise specifiedin writing to the Contractor, be delivered to the office of OPN Architects, Inc., 200 FifthAvenue S.E., Suite 201, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401 and any notice to or demand upon theOwner shall be sufficiently given if so delivered, or if deposited in the United States mail ina sealed, postage prepaid envelope, or delivered with charges prepaid to any telegraphcompany for transmission to said Owner at such address, or to such other representativesof the Owner may subsequently specify in writing to the Contractor for such purpose."
3. "4.2.4.3 Any such notice shall be deemed to have been given as of the time of actualdelivery of (in the case of mailing) when the same should have been received in duecourse of post, or in the case of telegrams, at the time of actual receipt, as the case maybe."
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
1. Paragraph 7.1 Changes
A. Sub-paragraph 7.1.4: Add the following sub-paragraph: "7.1.4 Supporting data used to determine the costs and allowances claimed in
Sub-paragraph 7.3.7 must be made available to the Architect upon request."
2. Paragraph 7.2 Change Orders
A. Sub-paragraph 7.2.2: Add the following sub-paragraph:1. "7.2.2 The forms used to process a Change Order will include AIA Document G701,
Change Order.”
3. Paragraph 7.3 Construction Change Directives
A. Sub-paragraph 7.3.3.3; Substitute the following: ".3 cost to be determined in a manner agreedupon by the parties, plus the percentage of combined overhead and profit.
B. Sub-paragraph 7.3.7; Line 4: Replace "set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a
reasonable amount." with "indicated in sub-paragraph 7.3.11.
C. Add sub-paragraph 7.3.11:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 4
"7.3.11 The maximum percentage of combined overhead and profit for changes in thework performed by the Contractor shall be 10%. If the changed work is performed by aSubcontractor, a maximum of 5% may be added by that Subcontractor on his work forcombined overhead and profit and an additional maximum of 5% may be added by theContractor for administration and coordination of said Subcontrac-tor work. This paragraphshall apply to the methods set forth in sub-paragraphs 7.3.3.1 and 7.3.3.4 for determiningthe costs of changed work unless waived in writing by the Owner. The Contractor shallverify compliance of the Subcontractors and shall not sign Change Orders which do notcomply with the maximum limits."
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
1. Paragraph 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time
A. Sub-paragraph 8.3.1, line 4: delete “… and arbitration …“ Add the following language to the end of Paragraph 8.3.1:
"A time extension shall be Contractor’s sole remedy and compensation for all suchdelays other than those resulting from the acts or negligence of the Owner, theArchitect, or the Owner’s separate contractors (collectively “Owner Caused Delays”). For proven Owner Caused Delays, the Contractor may recoup the actual costsresulting from such delays, but not for any additional profit or fee.”
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
1. Paragraph 9.3 Applications for Payment
A. Sub-paragraph 9.3.1; change to read as follows:1. "At least thirty days before……...., and shall reflect retainage of five percent of the total
amount due the Contractor."
B. Add the following new text to the end of Sub-paragraph 9.3.1:1. "Provided that an Application from Payment is received by the Architect not later than three
weeks prior to each College Community School District Normal Board Meeting, the Ownershall make payment of the certified amount to the Contractor not later than the Fridayfollowing the normal monthly Board Meeting. If an Application for Payment is received bythe Architect after the application date fixed above, payment shall be made by the Ownernot later than Forty Five (45) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment."
2. Paragraph 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification
A. Delete Sub-paragraph 9.5.3 and replace with the following:1. "9.5.3 The Contractor shall make accessible and available to the Architect all labor,
material, and equipment accounts related to the work in question, insofar as they may inany way affect a disputed amount due the Contractor from the Owner."
3. Paragraph 9.6.Progress Payments
A. Sub-paragraph 9.6.4; Delete the first two sentences of paragraph.
4. Paragraph 9.7 Failure of Payment
A. Sub-paragraph 9.7.1; revise the sub-paragraph as follows: In the first line, change “…seven days…” to “… fifteen days…” In the second line, change “…seven days…” to “… fifteen days…”
5. Paragraph 9.8 Substantial Completion
A. Sub-paragraph 9.8.1; add the following to the end of the sub-paragraph:1. "...subject only to completion of minor punch list items, the absence of completion of which
does not interfere with the Owner’s intended use of the Project.”
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 5
B. Sub-paragraph 9.8.6; add the following new sub-paragraph: The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any Architect’s additional services made
necessary by the Contractor’s failure to finally complete the Work within sixty (60) daysafter the date of Project Substantial Completion.”
C. Sub-paragraph 9.8.7; add the following new sub-paragraph: "9.8.7 Request for Early Release of Retainage Funds: If the Contractor makes a proper
request for early release of retainage funds, the Owner will release all retainage funds atthe next monthly Board meeting or within thirty (30) days of receipt of the request,whichever is less, except it may retain from the released retainage the following: An amount equal to 200% of the value of labor or materials yet to be provided on the
Project as determined by the Owner and its authorized contract representative. Forpurposes of this section, “authorized contract representative” means the Architect ofrecord on the Project, unless otherwise specified.
An amount equal to 200% of the value of any Chapter 573 claims currently on file atthe time the Request for Release of Retainage is approved. If the Owner withholds anamount from the retainage payment to the Contractor, the Owner will provide areason the request is being denied to the Contractor within thirty (30) calendar days ofthe receipt of the request.”
ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
1. Paragraph 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs
A. Add sub-paragraph 10.1.1 as follows: "10.1.1 Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to keep the site and work in
compliance with the safety and health regulations for construction issued by the Bureau ofLabor Standards of the U.S. Department of Labor as well as the Occupational Safety andHealth Standards parts 1910 and 1926 as amended and as enforced by the State of Iowa."
2. Paragraph 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property
A. Add the following text to Sub-paragraph 10.2.2: "Contractors shall also comply with the Iowa Smoke Free Air Act while on Owner Property
and shall not smoke any tobacco product while on Owner property. For purposes of thissubparagraph, Owner property shall include inside private Contractor or employee ownedvehicles while parked on Owner property.”
A. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.1.1: Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause 11.1.1.1 and add "...,including private entities performing Work at the site and exempt from the coverage on accountof number of employees or occupation, which entities shall maintain voluntary compensationcoverage at the same limits specified for mandatory coverage for the duration of the Project;"
B. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.1.2: Delete the semicolon at the end of Clause 11.1.1.2 and add ",orpersons or entities excluded by statute from the requirements of Clause 11.1.1.1 but requiredby the Contract Documents to provide the insurance required by the Clause;"
C. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.1.9: Add the following sub- paragraph:1. "11.1.1.9 Liability Insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a
comprehen-sive basis including:a. Premises Operations (including X, C and U cover-ages as applicable).b. Independent Contractors' Protective.c. Products and Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum
period of at least two (2) years after either 90 days following Substantial Completion
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 6
or final payment, whichever is earlier. Broad form property damage coverage shallinclude completed operations.
d. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted.e. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph
3.18.f. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.g. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations."
D. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.1.10: Add the following sub-paragraph:1. "11.1.1.10 Liability coverages shall be provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy
on an occurrence basis, the policy date shall predate the Contract; the termination date ofthe policy shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to bemaintained after final payment, certified in accordance with sub-paragraph 9.10.2."
E. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.2.1: Add the following sub- paragraph:1. "11.1.2.1 The insurance required by sub-paragraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less
than the fol-lowing limits, or greater if required by law:a. Worker's Compensation
(a) $500,000 per Accident(b) $500,000 Disease, Policy Limit(c) $500,000 Disease, Each Employee
b. Commercial General Liability (including Premises-Operations; IndependentContractors’ Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Contractual Liability;Broad Form Property Damage):1) Combined Single Limit: $1,000,000 each occurrence.2) Fire or Explosion Damage: $100,000 on any one fire.3) Medical Expense: $5,000 on any one person.4) General Aggregate: $2,000,000.5) Products and Completed Operations: $2,000,000 aggregate;6) Liability insurance shall not excluded x, c, and u coverages. General aggregate
shall apply in total to this project only.c. Personal and advertising Injury limit: $1,000,000.d. Business Auto Liability (include "any auto"):
1) $1,000,000 combined single limit.e. Umbrella Excess Liability:
1) $2,000,000 Each Occurrence.2) $2,000,000 Aggregate.
F. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.3: Add the following: "The Certificate of Insurance form shall be AIA Document G705, Certificate of Insurance,
or ACCORD form 25-S."
G. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.5: Add the following: "11.1.4 "A certificate of the Contractor's insurance, shall be filed with the Owner
evidencing this coverage. The Contractor shall provide property insurance for portions ofthe work stored off the site and also for portions of the work in transit. Portions of the workstored off site may be included in Applications for Payment per Paragraph 9.3.2 subject tosubmittal of detailed material lists, value statements, and certificate of insurance identifyingsame as work covered on the Owner’s behalf for this Project."
H. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.6: Add the following: "11.1.5 All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed
with the Owner and Architect shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 7
same. All certificates and/or policies shall be signed with an original signature. Signaturestamps shall not be used."
I. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.7: Add the following: "11.1.6 Also each document shall be accompanied by a power of attorney or other
evidence as may be necessary indicating that the person signing the certificate as theauthorized representative has the authority to do so."
J. Sub-Paragraph 11.1.8: Add the following: "11.1.7 College Community School District and its agents or assigns shall be named
Additional Insured on such liability policy furnished by the Contractor on a primary basis. The company and the insured expressly agree and state that the purchase of this policy of
insurance by the insured does not waive any of the defenses of governmental immunityavailable to the insured under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may beamended form time to time. The company and the insured further agree that this policy ofinsurance shall cover only those claims not subject to the defense of governmentalimmunity under Iowa Code Section 670.4 as it now exists and as it may be amended formtime to time.”
2. Paragraph 11.3 Property Insurance
A. Sub-Paragraph 11.3.1.1: delete "... earthquake, flood..." from the fourth line.
B. Sub-Paragraph 11.3.2: delete this paragraph in its entirety.
C. Sub-Paragraph 11.3.3: delete this paragraph in its entirety.
3. Paragraph 11.4 Performance Bond and Payment Bond
A. Sub-Paragraph 11.4.1: Delete this paragraph and substitute the following: "11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract
and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be obtained through theContractor's usual source and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum.Bonds shall be subject to approval of Owner. The amount of each bond shall be equal to100 percent of the Contract Sum. 11.4.1.1 The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than
ten days following the date the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to becommenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor shall, prior tothe commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that suchbonds will be furnished.
11.4.1.2 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in fact who executes the requiredbonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the powerof attorney."
ARTICLE 12 – CORRECTION OF WORK
1. Paragraph 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion:
A. Sub-Paragraph 12.2.2.1 lines 1 and 8; change "one year" to "two years".
B. Sub-Paragraph 12.2.2.2, line 1; change "one-year" to "two-year".
C. Sub Paragraph 12.2.2.3, line 1; change "one-year" to "two-year".
2. Paragraph 12.2.5, line 3; change "one-year" to "two-year".
ARTICLE 13 – MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
1. Paragraph 13.6: Substitute the following paragraph:
Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date thepayment is due and shall bear interest at the rate established by Section 74A, Code of Iowa.”
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 8
2. Paragraph 13.7 Time Limits on Claims
Delete 13.7 and replace with the following: COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD
13.7.1 As between the Owner and Contractor: ".1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior
to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute oflimitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall bedeemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date ofSubstantial Completion;
.2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As toacts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of SubstantialCompletion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, anyapplicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause ofaction shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than thedate of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and
.3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurringafter the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, anyapplicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause ofaction shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than thedate of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any Warrantyprovided under Section 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure tocorrect the Work by the Contractor under Section 12.2, or the date of actualcommission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by theContractor or Owner, whichever occurs last.”
ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
1. Paragraph 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause
A. Sub-paragraph 14.2.2, line 5; after the word "surety" insert, "and unless otherwise prohibited byapplicable statutory law:"
ARTICLE 15 – CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
1. Subparagraph 15.2.8: delete current language in its entirety and replace with the following:
"If a Claim relates to or is the subject of an Iowa Code Chapter 573 Claim, the party assertingsuch Claim may proceed in accordance with Iowa Code Chapter 573 to comply with the IowaCode Chapter 573 notice and/or filing deadlines prior to resolution of the Claim by the Architector by mediation.”
2. Paragraph 15.3 Mediation:
Sub-paragraph 15.3.2: delete the last two sentences in this sub-paragraph.
3. Paragraph 15.4 Arbitration: delete 15.4 in its entirety.
ARTICLE 16 – SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
1. Paragraph 16.1 Reference; add the following:
"16.1 Reference
All references to provisions in Article 16 – Supplementary Conditions are hereby transferred toSection 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions. Any modifications stated in Section 00 73 00shall have the same force and effect as if stated in Article 16."
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 9
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 00 - 10
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SPECIAL CONDITIONS 00 73 10 - 1
SECTION 00 73 10 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS
TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS PROCUREMENT GOAL:
It is hereby agreed that when entering into this contract with the Owner, the Prime Contractors will takedocumented steps to encourage participation from Targeted Small Businesses for the purpose ofsubcontracting or supplying material. The project has a Targeted Small Business participation goal of tenpercent (10%).
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SPECIAL CONDITIONS 00 73 10 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 1
SECTION 01 10 00 - SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A. Project Name: College Community Tennis Courts and Parking Lot Expansion.
B. Owner's Name: College Community School District.
C. Architect's Name: OPN Architects, 200 Fifth Street SE, Suite 201, Cedar Rapids, Iowa.
D. The Project is a single prime contract to construct new tennis courts and expand an existingparking lot.
1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document00 52 00 - Agreement Form.
1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carriedout smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Workof this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
1.04 WORK BY OWNER
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes providing support systems to receiveOwner's equipment and making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections, if applicable.1. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shalldesignate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items atProject site.
3. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage duringstorage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractorshall repair or replace them.
5. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.
B. Owner will supply the following for installation by Contractor: Include items designated ondrawings as Owner Furnished - Contractor Installed (OFCI).
C. Owner will supply and install items designated on the drawings as Owner Furnished - OwnerInstalled (OFOI).
1.05 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy andto place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion,provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement ofequipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.1. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the
Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy.2. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner
occupancy.3. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. Onoccupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems servingoccupied portions of building.
4. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service foroccupied portions of building.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUMMARY 01 10 00 - 2
C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.
1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings. 1. General Contractor shall provide site construction fence and gates as required to enclose
construction areas.
B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow:1. Owner occupancy.2. Work by Others.3. Work by Owner.4. Use of site and premises by the public.
C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open
during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarilyaltered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
D. Nonsmoking Campus: Smoking or any tobacco use is not permitted on the school campus.
1.07 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help
cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are innumeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Sectionnumbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the ProjectManual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in theSpecifications.
B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language andthe intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular wordsshall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular whereapplicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarityto describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others whenso noted.a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 1
SECTION 01 20 00 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.
B. Documentation of changes in Contract Sum and Contract Time.
C. Change procedures.
D. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 00 50 00 - Contracting Forms and Supplements: Forms to be used.
1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor'sconstruction schedule.1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.b. Submittal schedule.c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction
schedule.2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven
days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items forthe schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:
a. Project name and location.b. Name of Architect.c. Architect's project number.d. Contractor's name and address.e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703 .3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:a. Related Specification Section or Division.b. Description of the Work.c. Name of subcontractor.d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.e. Name of supplier.f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest
one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.1) Labor.2) Materials.3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continuedevaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with ProjectManual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts inexcess of fivepercent of the Contract Sum.a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for LEED
documentation and other Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling fivepercent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 2
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work whereApplications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated andstored, but not yet installed.a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required,
include evidence of insurance.7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied bymeasured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determinequantities.
9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for eachpurchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner paymentsor deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.
10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values ordistributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the nextApplications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result ina change in the Contract Sum.
1.04 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.
B. Form to be used: AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications forPayment..
C. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:1. Description of work.2. Previous Applications.3. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application.4. Authorized Change Orders.5. Total Completed to Date of Application.6. Percentage of Completion.7. Balance to Finish.8. Retainage.
D. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. Applications shall be notarized. Architectwill return incomplete applications without action.1. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each
line item for portion of work performed and for stored products.2. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number
and dollar amount as for an original item of Work.3. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipmentpurchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items storedon-site and items stored off-site.1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of
surety to payment, for stored materials.2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices.
Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not includeoverhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 3
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previousApplications for Payment.
b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application forPayment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment andremaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic'slien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contractand related to the Work covered by the payment.1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entitles involved in the Work must submit
waivers.4. Waivers: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of mechanic's lien
for construction period covered by the application.5. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled toa lien.
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede orcoincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:1. List of subcontractors.2. Schedule of Values.3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if it's not final).4. Schedule of unit prices, if applicable.5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.7. Copies of building permits.8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.9. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.10. Performance and Payment Bonds.11. Information requred for Owner's insurance.
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of SubstantialCompletion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion ofthe Work claimed as substantially complete.1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supportingdocumentation not prevously submitted and accepted, including but not limited tot he following:1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where requried and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."6. AIA Docuement G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."7. Evidence that claims have been settled.8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumedresponsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 4
9. Removal of temporary facilities and services.10. Change of door locks to Owner's access.
1.05 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, notinvolving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Architect's Instruction toContractor" (ITC) form.
B. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Architectwill issue instructions directly to Contractor by ITC.
C. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests or ITC's: Architect will issue a detailed description ofproposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the ContractTime. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings andSpecifications.1. Proposal Requests or ITC's issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider
them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.2. Within 14 days after receipt of Proposal Request or ITC, submit a quotation estimating
cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to excute thechange.a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data tosubstantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of tradediscounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finishtimes, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting anextension of the Contract Time.
D. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructingContractor to proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of
determining any change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.2. Promptly execute the change.
E. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includesa detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings andspecifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of anyovertime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will beconsidered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 10 days.
F. Contractor may propose a change by submitting a request for change to Architect, describingthe proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason forthe change, and the effect on the Contract Sum and Contract Time with full documentation anda statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of theproposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with totalamount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data tosubstantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of tradediscounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 5
activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of theContract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposedchange requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 6
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
UNIT PRICES 01 22 00 - 1
SECTION 01 22 00 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. List of unit prices, for use in preparing Bids.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
B. Unsatisfactory soils are soils that are deemed by the geotechnical engineer as unsuitable for construction purposes. The geotechnical engineer is the sole judge of suitability of existing soil.
1.03 PROCEEDURES
A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B. Measurement and Payment: 1. Unit Price - If the change concerns a number of units which cannot be determined in
advance, a Construction Change Directive on the AIA G714 Form will be written, listing the price per unit to be paid. When all units have been completed, this directive will be converted to a Change Order for a fixed amount. If the change cannot wait for processing a Change Order, a Construction Change Directive on the AIA G714 Form, which, when signed by all parties, will permit the change to be made prior to knowing the final cost. Details of determining the cost, such as time and material, will be clearly listed in the Directive. Once the final cost has been determined, this Directive will be converted to a Change Order for a fixed amount.
C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D. List of Unit Prices: Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.
E. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit.
1.04 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED
A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount.
1.05 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES
A. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required.
B. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness.
1.06 LIST OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. 1: Remove unsatisfactory subgrade materials and replace with compacted general fill.
1.07 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES
A. Unit Price No. 1: Remove unsatisfactory subgrade materials and replace with compacted general fill.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
UNIT PRICES 01 22 00 - 2
1. Description: Unit price to over-excavate soft and/or unsatisfactory soils at all paved areas on the site, load, and remove unsuitable materials from the site and dispose of at an acceptable off-site location, or wasted on site in fill areas covered only by turf, landscaping or under playground areas. Payment will not be made for excess excavation work that is not specifically authorized by the Geotechnical Engineer.
2. Fill overexcavated areas with imported fill in compliance with Section 31 23 23. 3. Unit of Measurement: A registered engineer or surveyor, selected and paid for by the
Owner and approved by the Architect, shall provide cross sections and quantity calculations for determining the actual amount of over-excavation. Cross sections shall be taken as necessary to obtain accurate quantities. Elevations are required on both the resulting subgrade after topsoil stripping operations as well as the bottom of over-excavation. Calculate quantities based upon the Average End Area Method. Shrink/swell factors shall not be considered part of these calculations or quantities.
4. Compensation: Lump sum adjustments to contract amount shall be cumulative net change of compacted imported fill from that required by the contract documents, multiplied by unit price #1.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 1
SECTION 01 30 00 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preconstruction meeting.
B. Site mobilization meeting.
C. Progress meetings.
D. Construction progress schedule.
E. Coordination drawings.
F. Requests for Information (RFI)
G. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
H. Electronic submittal procedures.
I. Submittal procedures.
1.02 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of theSpecifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinateconstruction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for properinstallation, connection, and operation.1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before orafter its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance andaccessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special proceduresrequired for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendeesat meetings.1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrativeprocedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress ofthe Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.2. Preparation of the schedule of values.3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.4. Delivery and processing of submittals.5. Progress meetings.6. Preinstallation conferences.7. Project closeout activities.8. Startup and adjustment of systems.
D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out withconsideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use oftemporary utilities to minimize waste.1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated
into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that aredesignated as Owner's property.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MEETINGS, GENERAL
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwiseindicated.1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduledmeeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and
agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, includingOwner, and Architect, within three days of the meeting.
3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. General Contractor shall schedule and conduct a preconstruction meeting before startingconstruction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but not later than 15 days afterexecution of the Agreement.1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concernedparties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar withProject and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:a. Tentative construction schedule.b. Phasing.c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.e. Lines of communications.f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.g. Procedures for RFIs.h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.k. Submittal procedures.l. Preparation of record documents.m. Use of the premises.n. Work restrictions.o. Working hours.p. Owner's occupancy requirements.q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.t. Construction waste management and recycling.u. Parking availability.v. Office, work, and storage areas.w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.x. First aid.y. Security.z. Progress cleaning.
B. Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with twocopies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 3
3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at weekly intervals or asotherwise agreed to by all parties.
B. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. All participants at the meeting shallbe familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters regarding the Work.
C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review otheritems of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate tostatus of Project and as follows:1. Review minutes of previous meetings.2. Review of Work progress.3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.6. Quality and work standards.7. Status of RFI's.8. Status of proposal requests.9. Pending changes,10. Status of Change Orders.11. Maintenance of progress schedule.12. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.13. Planned progress during succeeding work period.14. Coordination of projected progress.15. Maintenance of quality and work standards.16. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.17. Other business relating to Work.
D. Record minutes and distribute on submittal website within three days after meeting.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days.
B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed completeschedule for review.1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
D. Submit updated schedule monthly and submit with Application for Payment.
3.05 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Provide information required for preparation of coordination drawings. Complete information ona single drawing illustrating the following proposed materials and mounting heights:1. Architectural walls and ceiling materials. Identify ceiling heights.2. Structural framing and other structural elements above the proposed ceiling line. Identify
sizes of structural members. Identify bottom of structure.3. Mechanical ductwork (two line diagrams) and equipment. Identify size of ductwork and
equipment. Identify top and bottom of ductwork and equipment.4. Plumbing supply and drain lines. Identify size of plumbing lines. Identify bottom of piping.
Identify top and bottom of piping at crossovers with other elements.5. Fire protection piping lines. Identify size of plumbing lines. Identify bottom of piping. Identify
top and bottom of piping at crossovers with other elements.6. Electrical equipment mounted above the ceiling. Identify top and bottom side of equipment.7. Locations of recessed light fixtures. Identify top of fixture.8. Identify top and bottom side of equipment.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 4
9. Data cable trays and equipment mounted above the ceiling. Identify bottom of cable trays.10. Identify access panels necessary for equipment access or maintainance.11. Identify other elements requiring above ceiling coordination.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and
mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations ofvisible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plandrawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanicaland electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum toaccommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflictbetween light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plansand elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electricalequipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of
embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, doorfloor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similaritems.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,
cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm
locations.c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor
control center locations.d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.
8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.
C. Review drawings prior to submission to Architect.
D. Architect Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is beingcoordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. IfArchitect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope ordetail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes asdirected and resubmit.
3.06 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of theContract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor
with no response.2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work
or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information orinterpretation and the following:1. Project name.2. Project number.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 5
3. Date.4. Name of Contractor.5. Name of Architect.6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.7. RFI subject.8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.12. Contractor's signature.13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe itemsneeding interpretation.a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected
materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or other form acceptable to Architect.1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architectafter 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.b. Requests for approval of substitutions.c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which caseArchitect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the ContractSum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01Section "Contract Modification Procedures."a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:1. Project name.2. Name and address of Contractor.3. Name and address of Architect.4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.5. RFI description.6. Date the RFI was submitted.7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI responseto affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractordisagrees with response.1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 6
3.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S FILES
A. General: At Contractor's written request, the Architect will provide electronic files forContractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:1. Electronic CAD files shall only be provided for base site plans, base floor plans and base
reflected ceiling plans, excluding dimensions and notes. No other electronic drawing filesshall be provided.
2. Contractor requesting files shall complete the "Terms and Conditions for Use of ElectronicFiles" form which follows this section and return to OPN Architects with applicable feepayment.
3. Upon receipt of completed form and payment, Contractor shall be sent requested fileseither by e-mail or mailed CD as required by file properties. Allow two business days afterreceipt of form and payment for delivery of files.
4. Requests for Civil, Structural, Fire Protection, Plumbing, Heating and Ventilation, Electricaland Technology electronic files shall be submitted directly to consultant responsible fortheir preparation. These requests shall be subject to applicable consultant's terms,conditions and fees.
3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:1. Product data.2. Shop drawings.3. Samples for selection.4. Samples for verification.
B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance withinformation given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURESarticle below .
3.09 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for eachportion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to aspecial design. Include the following information in tabular form:1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying
products.2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of keypersonnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Projectsite. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephonenumbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in theabsence of individuals assigned to Project.1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary
telephone. Keep list current at all times.
C. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:1. Design data.2. Certificates.3. Test reports.4. Inspection reports.5. Manufacturer's instructions.6. Manufacturer's field reports.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 7
7. Photos of samples to be delivered.8. Other types indicated.
D. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will betaken.
3.10 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:1. Project record documents.2. Operation and maintenance data.3. Warranties.4. Bonds.5. Other types as indicated.
B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.
3.11 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
A. Documents for Review:1. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches: Submit one reproducible transparency
and one opaque reproduction.
B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies.
C. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; in addition, submitphoto of sample on electronic submittal website.
3.12 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Transmit each submittal with approved form.
B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and asequential alphabetic suffix.
C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, andspecification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification ofProducts required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination ofinformation is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may bedetrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
I. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
J. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability tocomply with requirements.
K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
L. Make an electronic copy (2) of all submittals to turn over on a flash drive at end of project.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01 30 00 - 8
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 1
SECTION 01 32 16 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Preliminary schedule.
B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.
C. Construction reports.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining plannedoperations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
B. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed completeschedule for review.
C. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule.
D. Submit updated schedule monthly, submit with each Application for Payment.
1.03 SCHEDULE FORMAT
A. Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify eachactivity with the applicable specification section number.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
2.01 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice of Award to date of finalcompletion.1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each mainelement of the Work. Comply with the following:1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 14 days, unless specifically
allowed by Architect.2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities inschedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times inContractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial
Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary forcertification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punchlist items and final completion.
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents andas follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract.3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 2
c. Uninterruptible services.d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.e. Use of premises restrictions.f. Provisions for future construction.g. Seasonal variations.h. Environmental control.
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of theWork, including, but not limited to, the following:a. Subcontract awards.b. Submittals.c. Purchases.d. Mockups.e. Fabrication.f. Sample testing.g. Deliveries.h. Installation.i. Tests and inspections.j. Adjusting.k. Curing.l. Building flush-out.m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
6. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of theWork. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced orintegrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:a. Structural completion.b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.c. Permanent space enclosure.d. Completion of mechanical installation.e. Completion of electrical installation.f. Substantial Completion.
7. Other Constraints: Insert constraints not indicated elsewhere.
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, butnot limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.1. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.
E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned andactual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur orcommence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:1. Unresolved issues.2. Unanswered Requests for Information.3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.4. Notations on returned submittals.5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.
G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar daysbehind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating meansby which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes toworking hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, anddate by which recovery will be accomplished.
H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that hasbeen developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 3
2.02 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the followinginformation concerning events at Project site:1. List of subcontractors at Project site.2. List of separate contractors at Project site.3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.4. Equipment at Project site.5. Material deliveries.6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or
snow.7. Accidents.8. Meetings and significant decisions.9. Unusual events (see special reports).10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.11. Meter readings and similar recordings.12. Emergency procedures.13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.14. Change Orders received and implemented.15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.16. Services connected and disconnected.17. Equipment or system tests and startups.18. Partial completions and occupancies.19. Substantial Completions authorized.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
3.02 CONTENT
A. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion ofeach element of construction.
B. Identify each item by specification section number.
C. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities.
D. Provide sub-schedules for each phase of Work identified in the Phasing Drawings.
E. Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Workcompleted, as of the first day of each month.
F. Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.
3.03 BAR CHARTS
A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.
B. Identify the first work day of each week.
3.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE
A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.
B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.
C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.
3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE
A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of eachactivity.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01 32 16 - 4
C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and otheridentifiable changes.
E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
3.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE
A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors,suppliers, Architect, Owner, and other concerned parties.
B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown inschedules.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Submittals.
B. Testing and inspection agencies and services.
C. Control of installation.
D. Tolerances.
E. Defect Assessment.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 42 16 - Definitions.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect andto Contractor.
B. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by themanufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantitiesspecified for Product Data.1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printedinstructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for theOwner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring specialattention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.
D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator orfor Owner.1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not includedin the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of thestandard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicablecodes.
B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, exceptwhere a specific date is established by applicable code.
C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarificationfrom Architect before proceeding.
D. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract northose of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inferenceotherwise in any reference document.
1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES AND SERVICES
A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specifiedtesting and inspections.1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged toperform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by workthat failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and theContract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 2
B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work inaccordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, andworkmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification fromArchitect before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringenttolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more preciseworkmanship.
E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by themanufacturer.
G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstandstresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with ContractDocuments, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.03 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. See individual specification sections for testing required.
B. Testing Agency Duties:1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performance of services.2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or products.5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect.6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D. Contractor Responsibilities:1. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work .2. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 3
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
3. Notify Architect, Owner and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operationsrequiring testing/inspection services.
4. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additionalsamples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
5. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspectionsrequired by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performedby the same agency on instructions by Architect.
F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for byContractor.
3.04 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
3.05 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repairdamaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification
Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durableseams that are as invisible as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment ofresponsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 4
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
DEFINITIONS 01 42 16 - 1
SECTION 01 42 16 - DEFINITIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions.
B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Approved: When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, andrequests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in theConditions of the Contract.
B. Directed: A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,""authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed".
C. Furnish: To supply, deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,installation, and similar operation.
D. Indicated: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted,""scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."
E. Install: To unload, temporaily store, unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, anchor, work todimensions, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for use.
F. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the workresult. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection andnot incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used equipment.
G. Project Site: Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site isshown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on whichProject is to be built.
H. Provide: To furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
I. Regulations: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities havingjurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that controlperformance of the Work.
J. Supply: Same as Furnish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
DEFINITIONS 01 42 16 - 2
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1
SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary utilities.
B. Temporary sanitary facilities.
C. Temporary Controls: fencing.
D. Vehicular access and parking.
1.02 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas forconstruction personnel.
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPAConstruction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
A. Coordinate location of job trailer, dumpster and associated temporary facilities withinconstruction site boundaries. Upon completion of work, remove temporary facilities and restoresite areas to original condition.
B. Utilities:1. General Congractor will be allowed to connect to existing utilities. Owner will pay for
utilities during construction.
C. General Contractor will provide all connections to utilities.
D. Existing facilities may be used.
E. New permanent facilities may be used.
F. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.05 FENCING
A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence and orange safety fence as noted onconstruction documents
1.06 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities,and access for emergency vehicles.
B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.
C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space isnot adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
1.07 WASTE REMOVAL
A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean andorderly condition.
B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitablenon-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structureunless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 2
D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containerswith lids.
1.08 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Date of SubstantialCompletion inspection.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
E. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interferencewith performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of theWork.
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities areno longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of permanent facilities.
3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install temporary service.1. Arrange with utility company, To make connections for temporary services.
B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate forconstruction.
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use ofconstruction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type,number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
D. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size,capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.1. Connect temporary service to Utility.
E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination forconstruction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
3.03 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and pavedareas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintaintemporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Extend temporaryroads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for constructionoperations.
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.1. Dispose of rainwater in lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and
equipment" and not temporary facilities.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 3
3.04 SECURITY AND PROTECTION OF FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, andother improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to beremoved or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conductconstruction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possibleair, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified.
D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip lineof trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree rootsystems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosurefence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except byentrance gates.
F. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities havingjurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 4
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1
SECTION 01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General product requirements.
B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C. Product option requirements.
D. Substitution limitations and procedures.
E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchases for Project ortaken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,""equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published productliterature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project orfacility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered newproducts.
3. Comparable Products: Product that is demonstrated and approved, prior to bid, throughsubstitution process, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension,in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics thatequal or exceed those specified products.
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer'sproduct is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make ormodel number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function,dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristicsfor purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in thespecification.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy toidentify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electricalcharacteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service forfunctional equipment and appliances.
C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, withintegral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEW PRODUCTS
A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B. DO NOT USE products having any of the following characteristics:1. Containing lead, cadmium, asbestos.
2.02 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified inindividual specification sections.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 2
B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
2.03 PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurerent with, otherwarranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations onproduct warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the ContractDocuments.1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a
particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific
rights for Owner.
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms andidentification, ready for execution.1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.2. Specified Form: Wehn specified forms are include with the Specifications, prepare a
written document using indicated from properly executed.3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, areundamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and usedsuccessfully in similar situations on other projects.
3. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.4. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish salient characteristics of products.
B. Product Selection Procedures:1. Comparable products, or substitutions for Contractor's convenience, will not be considered
unless approved by the Architect prior to bid.2. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.3. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.
4. Basis-of Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a productindicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified orindicated product or a comparable product, that meets or exceeds the characteristics ofthe basis-of-design product, by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings andspecifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are basedon the product named. Designation as an acceptable comparable manufacturer does notsignify acceptance of a specific product by that manufacturer unless it is deemed, by theArchitect, as meeting or exceeding the characteristics of the basis-of-design product.a. Construction Document design is based on the basis-of-design product listed, if a
comparable product from another named manufacturer is proposed, the Architectshall consider the Contractor's selection of a comparable product when the followingconditions are satisfied. If all of the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect willreturn requests without action, except to record non-compliance with theserequirements:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 3
1) Selected comparable product must be from one of the manufacturers listed asan acceptable manufacturer in the specifications and must meet or exceedperformance and characteristics of basis-of-design product..
2) Evidence that the selected comparable product does not require extensiverevisions to the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, andthat it is compatible with other portions of work.
3) Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed comparable product withthe basis-of-design product named in the Specifications. Significant qualitiesinclude attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, andspecific features and requirements indicated.
4) Evidence that comparable product provides warranty which meets or exceedsthat specified.
5) List of similar installations for completed projects with project names andaddresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
6) Samples, if requested.b. Products by unnamed manufacturers will only be considered prior to bid. Comply with
"Comparable Product Requests" paragraphs for consideration of comparableproducts.
c. Where a list of manufacturers is not provided, comply with "Comparable ProductRequests" paragraphs for consideration of comparable products. Comparable productrequest will ony be considered prior to bid.
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample" providea product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decisionwill be final on whether a proposed product matches.
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected byArchitect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies withrequirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer'sproduct line that includes both standard and premium items.
3.02 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions duringthe bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section.
B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitutionwith Contract Documents.
C. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.2. Agrees to provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.3. Agrees to coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required
for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
3.03 COMPARABLE PRODUCT REQUESTS
A. Submit request for consideration of each comparable product during the bidding periodcomplying with same time restrition as substitutions, using same form as substitution requests.Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include SpecificationSection number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within three days of receipt of request.2. Notification of approved substitutions shall be provided by Addendum.3. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable
product request within time allocated.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 4
3.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Package products for shipment in manner to prevent damage; for equipment, package to avoidloss of factory calibration.
B. If special precautions are required, attach instructions prominently and legibly on outside ofpackaging.
C. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize sitestorage time and potential damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism tostored materials.
D. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering ofsurrounding areas.
F. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities arecorrect, and products are undamaged.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement, or damage, and to minimize handling.
H. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according toinstallation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due toexcessive materials handling and misapplication.
B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environmentfavorable to product.
E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F. Protect products from damage or deterioration due to construction operations, weather,precipitation, humidity, temperature, sunlight and ultraviolet light, dirt, dust, and othercontaminants.
G. Comply with manufacturer's warranty conditions, if any.
H. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation toprevent condensation and degradation of products.
I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement, or damage.
K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verifyproducts are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 1
SECTION 01 70 00 - EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal,and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.
C. Cutting and patching.
D. Laying out the Work.
E. Cleaning and protection.
F. Starting of systems and equipment.
G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.
H. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
I. General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance ofother work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions afterinstallation of other work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor.6. Include in request:
a. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.b. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in buildingappearance and other significant visual elements.
c. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will performpatching work.
d. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.e. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that
cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems thatwill be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length oftime permanent services and systems will be disrupted.1) Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during
interruption of permanent services and systems.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching ofconstruction elements.1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut andpatch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity orincrease deflection.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 2
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related componentsin a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results inincreased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elementsinclude the following:a. Primary operational systems and equipment.b. Fire separation assemblies.c. Air or smoke barriers.d. Fire-suppression systems.e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.f. Control systems.g. Communication systems.h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.i. Conveying systems.j. Electrical wiring systems.k. Operating systems of special construction.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements orcomponents in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results inreducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance ordecreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are notlimited to the following:a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.b. Membranes and flashings.c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.e. Equipment supports.f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visualevidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a mannerthat would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove andreplace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's writtenrecommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Use of explosives is not permitted.
B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to preventaccumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
C. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and overadjacent property.1. Provide dust-proof barriers between construction areas and areas continuing to be
occupied by Owner.
D. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insectsfrom damaging the work.
E. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced byconstruction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual toensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 3
B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical workthat are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, andconduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spacesefficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas , conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locationsof fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
F. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective workand work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner'sactivities.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patchingand extending work.
B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products wherenecessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposedsurfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extentpossible.1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance ofin-place materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work beingapplied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimizewaste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correctlocations.
F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elementssubject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching meansacceptance of existing conditions.
G. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of theWork is required by other Sections, include the following:1. Description of the Work.2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.4. Recommended corrections.
H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceedingwith the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 4
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to [local utility] [Owner] that is necessary toadjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utilityappurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities havingjurisdiction.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheckmeasurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit toother construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements beforefabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying theWork.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items showndiagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
E. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
F. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior toapplying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment andelevation, as indicated.1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
C. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to befactory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm thatadequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicatedrequirements.
D. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequatesize and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and alignedwith other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verifysize and type required for load conditions.1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions
for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items withintegral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items toProject site in time for installation.
E. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical andhorizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not consideredhazardous.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 5
3.04 ALTERATIONS
A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation andexisting record documents only.1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.1. Remove items indicated on drawings.2. Relocate items indicated on drawings.3. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch,
and prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish ifnecessary for successful application of new finish.
4. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damagedsurfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible.
C. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical, andTelecommunications): Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate newconstruction.1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify installation to allow access orprovide access panel.
2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents requirereactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipmentas required.
3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with newservices, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and readyfor service.a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize
duration of outages.b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above
accessible ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stuband tag with identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for newconstruction.
D. Protect existing work to remain.1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
E. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
F. Patching: Where the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match thesurface finish that existed prior to cutting. Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patchso that the substrate is ready for the new finish.
G. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surfaces
to remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacentfinishes.
2. If mechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover andrefinish to match.
H. Clean existing systems and equipment.
I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site;do not burn or bury.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 6
3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching.
B. See Alterations article above for additional requirements.
C. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:1. Complete the work.2. Fit products together to integrate with other work.3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services.4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work.5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition.6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work.7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested.8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.
D. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriatesurfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore tooriginal condition.
E. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut ordamaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materialsso as not to void existing warranties.
F. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistantelements, and sight exposed surfaces.
G. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
H. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systemsare required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems beforecutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.
I. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without priorapproval.
J. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similaroperations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained oradjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; complywith original Installer's written recommendations.1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and withminimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevententrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
K. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
L. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
M. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voidswith fire rated material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, to full thickness of the penetratedelement.
N. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operationsfollowing performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 7
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in otherSections, where applicable.1. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an evensurface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wallcoverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color andappearance.a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paintcoat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats untilpatch blends with adjacent surfaces.
2. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-planesurface of uniform appearance.
3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to aweathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
4. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuoussurfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entireunit.
5. Match color, texture, and appearance.6. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other
imperfections due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repairsubstrate prior to repairing finish.
3.06 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderlycondition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closedor remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaningto eliminate dust.
D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and disposeoff-site; do not burn or bury.
3.07 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediatework area to prevent damage.
D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movementof heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity isnecessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing materialmanufacturer.
G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings ifpossible.
3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforcerequirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 8
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials anddebris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days ifthe temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary forproper execution of the Work.1. Remove liquid spills promptly.2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire
work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to writteninstructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materialsspecifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaningmaterials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposedsurfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary toensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materialsdown sewers or into waterways.
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoiningmaterials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection fromdamage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary throughthe remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensureoperability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of theconstruction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, orotherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.09 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, driverotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required bythe equipment or system manufacturer.
D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer'srepresentative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
F. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioningcorrectly.
3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A. See Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
B. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior todate of Substantial Completion.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 9
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
3.12 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to complywith local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollutionregulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean eachsurface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning andmaintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of
Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and otherforeign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and otherforeign deposits.
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project
site.e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free
of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering ofexterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean
according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polishmirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment[, elevator equipment,] and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and otherforeign substances.
m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stainsresulting from water exposure.
n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposedsurfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
D. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stainsand foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and softsurfaces.
E. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels ornameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
F. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to thesurface and material being cleaned.
G. Clean filters of operating equipment.
H. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 10
I. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
J. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Substantial Completion Procedures1. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed
and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list andreasons why the Work is incomplete.
2. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 daysprior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List itemsbelow that are incomplete at time of request.a. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having
jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services andutilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
b. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including projectrecord documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion constructionphotographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, andsimilar final record information.
c. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections,including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,final certifications, and similar documents.
d. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, anddeliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name andmodel number where applicable.1) Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of
maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each itemand name and number of related Specification Section.
e. Submit test/adjust/balance records.f. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design
requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections.g. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.3. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10
days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. Listitems below that are incomplete at time of request.a. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.b. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.c. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.d. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.e. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordingsspecified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."
f. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.g. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local
emergency responders.h. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.i. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 11
4. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion aminimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspectionand tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notifyContractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of SubstantialCompletion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list oradditional items identified by Architect's punch list, that must be completed or correctedbefore certificate will be issued.a. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.b. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
completion.
B. Final Completion Procedures:1. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final
completion, complete the following:a. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Price and
Payment Procedures."b. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsedand dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has beencompleted or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
c. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coveragecomplying with insurance requirements.
d. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.e. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.2. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On
receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor ofunfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment afterinspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or correctedbefore certificate will be issued.a. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections
as incomplete is completed or corrected.
C. List of Incomplete Items (Punch List)1. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by
construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, ifnecessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.a. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.b. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for
ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3.14 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination ofSubstantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defectiveparts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properlyadjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored,provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specifiedcondition.1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other
damaged transparent materials.2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 12
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, includingmechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels andidentification.
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impedeoperation or reduce longevity.
4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective andnoisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements fornew fixtures.
3.15 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than twoyears from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whicheveris longer.
C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,and lubricate as required.
D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replaceparts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor withoutprior written consent of the Owner.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 1
SECTION 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Project Record Documents.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings,product data, and samples.
B. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application forPayment.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data:1. Submit electronic copie of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents
before start of Work. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance.3. Submit one electronic copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This
copy will be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revisecontent of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit one written set and one electronic set, of revised final documents in final formwithin 10 days after final inspection.
C. Warranties and Bonds:1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance.2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as thebeginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:1. Drawings.2. Specifications.3. Addenda.4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
B. Record Prints:1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whetherindividual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information forpreparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult
to identify or measure and record later.b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 2
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made by Change Order or ConstructionChange Directive.k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.
3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Usepersonnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up recordprints.
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguishbetween changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted fromoriginal Drawings.
6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers,and similar identification, where applicable.
C. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.
D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
E. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
F. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual productsinstalled, including the following:1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractorsand suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, anddata applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment andsystems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents asmaintenance drawings.
D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructionsfor each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES
A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish:1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations.
B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agentsand methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, andrecommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 3
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions andsequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
C. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventativemaintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; andalignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
D. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.
E. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
F. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
G. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagramsrequired for maintenance.
H. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation ofdescribed products.
B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.
C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plasticcovers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into relatedconsistent groupings.
D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of productand major component parts of equipment.
F. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings tosize of text pages.
G. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or systemdescription identified, in three parts as follows:1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephonenumbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:a. Significant design criteria.b. List of equipment.c. Parts list for each component.d. Operating instructions.e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 - 4
b. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 1
SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Other Specification Sections: Additional requirements for demonstration and training.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting ofthe relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who
actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment.2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary
qualifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL
A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for thepurposes of this section, unless approved in advance by Owner.
B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable.
C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up,shut-down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenanceprocedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within three months.
D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, andrepair procedures.1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.
3.02 TRAINING - GENERAL
A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated.
B. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-scheduletraining sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure toconduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor forpersonnel "show-up" time.
C. Product- and System-Specific Training:1. Review the applicable O&M manuals.2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints,
and operational strategies.3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down,
seasonal changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, includingpreventative maintenance.
4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance.5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety
issues and emergency procedures.6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions.7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSIONCEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 - 2
8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voidingcoverage.
9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers.10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor.11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.
D. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer duringtraining session, provide written response within three days.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS EQUIPMENT 116823-1
SECTION 116823 – TENNIS EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide all equipment and materials, and do all work necessary to furnish and install the athletic equipment, as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Athletic equipment shall include but not be limited to: 1. Douglas DTP-37 Tennis Posts
2. Douglas TN-30DM Tennis Net #30030
3. Douglas VCP – Vinyl Coated Polyester, Open Mesh, 9’ Tall
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive requirements shall govern. 1. American Sports Builders Association (ASBA)
2. United States Tennis Association (USTA)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturers Product Data
1. Provide manufacturers product data prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners
representatives review.
B. Shop Drawings 1. Provide drawings of the manufacturers recommended installation and foundation requirements
prior to actual field installation work, for Architects or Owners representatives review.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers warranties shall pass to the Owner and certification made that the product materials meet all applicable grade trademarks or conform to industry standards and inspection requirements.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Material delivered to the site shall be examined for damage or defects in shipping. Any defects shall be noted and reported to the Owners representative. Replacements, if necessary, shall be immediately re-ordered, so as to minimize any conflict with construction schedule. Sound materials shall be stored above ground under protective cover or indoors so as to provide proper protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1.6 MANUFACTURER
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS EQUIPMENT 116823-2
A. Douglas Industries, Inc., 3441 S. 11th Ave. Eldridge, IA 52748; Phone: 800-553-8907, www.douglas-
sports.com
1.7 MATERIALS
A. Douglas DTP-37 Tennis Posts (item #63007) and DS-24 (item #63424). 1. COMPONENTS:
a. 3”OD Round 7 Gauge Heavy Wall (3/16”) Steel b. Internal Wind 30:1 Self Locking Gears c. Welding Lacing Rods d. Die-Cast Zinc Caps and Gear Housings e. Polyester Powder Coat Finish, Available Forest Green #63007 or Black #63008 f. Recommended: Galvanized Steel Ground Sleeves, GS-24RD/ST #63424
B. Douglas TN-30DM Tennis Net #30030
1. COMPONENTS:
a. 3.0mm Solid Core Knotted Braided Polyethylene with 285 lb. Break Strength b. Top Six Rows Hand-Braided Double Mesh Netting c. 2-Ply Vinyl Coated Polyester Headboard d. Black Vinyl Side Pockets with Fiberglass Dowels e. Standard Net Dimensions: 3’6” high X 41’9” long
C. Douglas VCP – Vinyl Coated Polyester
1. COMPONENTS:
a. Fabric: 50% Vinyl, 50% Polyester b. Open Mesh: 9x12 weave, 80% windbreak c. 8 oz. per square yard d. Tensile Strength: 230x200 e. Color: Black
D. Douglas Net Center Tie Down Anchor #63428 1. 2 inch galvanized pipe ground sleeve. To be cemented into court 9 inches long
E. Douglas Adjustable Center Strap #20600
1. 2 inch wide polyester white web, nickel plated web slides and snaps.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. All athletic equipment shall be installed as recommended with manufacturer’s written directions, and as indicated on the drawings.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 1
SECTION 26 00 10 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work shall include furnishing of all systems, equipment and material specified in this division and
as called for on the electrical drawings, to include supervision, operations, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete electrical installation.
B. All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft
involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. C. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards
of the craft. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and
standards:
1. National Electrical Code 2014 2. National Fire Protection Association 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 4. Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 5. Uniform Building Code 6. Occupational Safety and Health Act 7. Iowa Administrative Code
B. All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Engineer of any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Engineer for final decision.
1.04 REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local utility companies. He shall
check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services.
B. Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions
concerning this shall be referred to Engineer prior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company.
C. Secure and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and inspections. D. Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges
associated with new service.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 2
1.05 ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS
A. The electrical drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only. Contractor shall examine construction drawings to become familiar with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations.
B. Drawings for the electrical work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope
of the work and to indicate in general the location of equipment. C. Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations
for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of conduits and raceway so as to best fit the layout of the work.
D. Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling
of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as couplings, pull or splice boxes
may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications or where they are required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed.
1.06 ACTIVE SERVICES A. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to
beginning work in that area. B. Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected
against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C. When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to
authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D. Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with
requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 SITE INSPECTION A. Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the
conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside conduit to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles.
B. Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's
failure to make this inspection. 1.08 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A. It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the
General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B. Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall
coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Engineer reserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 3
C. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications or between the requirements set forth for
the various contractors shall be called to the attention of the Engineer. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Engineer and his decision will be final.
D. Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be
completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition.
E. Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the
Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided.
F. Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the contractor to
work in areas previously finished by the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Electrical Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect.
1.09 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Engineer. Where more than one unit is required of the same items, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise.
B. All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. C. The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts,
controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall furnish, to the Engineer, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal
data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B. Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much
as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected.
C. Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily
limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D. After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including
dates that the submittals will be to the Engineer for review.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 4
E. Submit required information on the following items:
OTHER
SUBMITTAL
SPEC
DETAIL
PROD
INSTALL
O & M
(SEE
DATE
SECTION
EQUIPMENT
DWGS DATA
SAMPLES
METHODS
MANUAL
NOTES)
BY CONTR.
26 05 33 Hand Holes X X
26 24 16 Panelboards X X
26 50 00 Lighting X X
NOTES:
F. Engineer will review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans
and specifications. G. Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings
and specifications. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer in duplicate upon
completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B. Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab
indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract:
1. Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6. Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. 7. Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Engineer and Contractor shall be included, if
applicable, along with the items listed above. C. Items to be included shall be those listed in shop drawing section.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 5
1.12 TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A. All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to
demonstrating systems to Owner. B. Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, or
his designated representatives, all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Owner instruction shall be provided for the following systems:
Sections
Description
Hrs. on Site
Hrs. off Site
Presented By
Others Present
Remarks
26 24 16
Electrical Dist. System/Lighting
2
Contractor
REMARKS:
C. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certificate signed by the Owner stating the date, time,
and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 6
CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION
This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction.
A. Project:
B. System(s):
C. Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 7
1.13 PERMITS, FEES, ETC. A. Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections required in connection with the electrical
work. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility.
1.14 SUBSTITUTIONS A. To obtain approval to use unspecified equipment, Bidding Contractors (not equipment supplier,
manufacturers, etc.) shall submit written requests to Engineer at least 10 days prior to bid due date. Requests shall clearly describe the equipment for which approval is being requested. Include all data necessary to demonstrate that equipment's capacities, features and performance are equivalent to include a cost comparison between specified equipment and equipment for which approval is being requested. If the equipment is acceptable, Engineer will approve it in an addenda. Engineer will, under no circumstances, be required to prove that an item proposed for substitution is or is not of equal quality to the specified item.
B. Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions
and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution.
1.15 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style,
dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Engineer at least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals.
B. Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at
time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and/or the manufacturer.
C. If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to
assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer.
D. Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements.
Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met.
1.16 GUARANTEE A. The entire electrical system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in
materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 00 10 - 8
1.17 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. A Contract Change Order is a written order to Contractor signed by the Owner and Contractor,
issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Contract Change Order.
B. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general
scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.
C. The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by
mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. A Change Order in excess of $300.00 shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself
that the change has been properly authorized in behalf of the Owner. 1.18 COMPLETION A. Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready
for normal use by the Owner. B. When all the electrical work is complete Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and
equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition.
C. Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left
during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.19 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Refer to Specification Division 1 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities.
END OF SECTION 26 00 10
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -
General Requirements and Section 26 00 10 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install all wiring
systems. B. This section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for general wiring systems
of 600 volts and less. Wiring for a higher voltage rating, if required, shall be as specified in other sections or called for on the drawings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical
wire, cable and connectors. B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards pertaining to wire, cable and connectors. C. UL Labels: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors which have been UL-listed and
labeled. D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers
Association standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of wire and cable. E. ANSI/ASTM: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction
of wire and cable. F. The materials used for wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged
in the manufacturing of the specified material. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE
A. All wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of
not less than 98% conductivity and shall be insulated to 600 V. Conductor sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, conductor sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
B. Minimum size conductors shall be #12 AWG for power and lighting and #14 AWG for signal and
control. C. Type of wire and cable for various applications shall be as follows:
1. Type THWN, or XHHW (75 deg. C) - use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations.
2. Type THHN, or XHHW (90 deg. C) - use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in dry locations only. Use where lighting branch circuit conductors are routed through fluorescent fixture channels.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 2
3. Type MTW, wet and dry locations - use for low voltage signal and control circuits
operating at 25 volts or less.
4. Type UF - use where permitted by other sections or by the drawings for underground burial branch circuits.
2.02 CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through
#8 AWG, conductors #6 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color coded with one-half inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. Colors shall be assigned to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch circuit distribution. When necessary to use tape, use colored tape on black wire. Do not use colored tape on colored wire.
120/208V 277/480V
Phase 'A' Conductor Black Brown Phase 'B' Conductor Red Orange Phase 'C' Conductor Blue Yellow Neutral Conductor White Grey Grounding Conductor Green Green
2.03 CONNECTORS
A. In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller, use 3M Co. "Scotchlock" vinyl
insulated spring connectors, or equal Ideal "wingnut" or Thomas & Betts. B. Connectors for conductors No. 6 and larger shall be of compression or split-bolt types, National
Electric, Thomas & Betts, Blackburn or Burndy mechanical connectors. Fill connector voids with electrical insulation putty, follow with 3-M Scotch tape #33, minimum 2 layers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wiring. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. All cable for major feeder shall be continuous from origin to termination, unless otherwise
indicated. B. Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessible junction boxes. C. All power feeder cable shall be pulled with the use of approved pulling compound or powder.
Compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot damage raceway.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3
E. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible.
F. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. G. The continuity of circuit conductors shall not be dependant on service connections such as lamp
holders, receptacles, etc., where the removal of such devices would interrupt the continuity. H. Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits.
Correct malfunctions when detected. B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 26 05 19
[BLANK PAGE]
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -
General Requirements and Section 26 00 10 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install
complete conduit systems. B. Conduit systems shall be provided for all wiring, except where the drawings or other sections of
the specifications indicate that certain wiring may be installed in cable trays, surface raceway, underfloor raceway, wireways and/or auxiliary gutters.
C. Types of raceways in this section include the following:
1. Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Intermediate metal conduit. 4. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. 5. Rigid metal conduit. 6. PVC 7. Rigid Conduit
D. Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install electrical boxes and fittings as required by drawings and specifications.
E. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to
raceways. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to
electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled.
C. NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of
raceway systems. D. The materials used in the fabrication of the raceway system shall be products of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. E. NEC compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical
wiring boxes and fittings. F. UL Compliance: Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL-listed and labeled.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2
G. ANSI/NEMA Standards Compliance: Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS
1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlet boxes, covers and box supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall
thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.
B. Rigid Conduit: Full weight, threaded, rigid steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by hot dip or
electro galvanized process. Additional protection by electrostatically applied baked coating. Thread protective caps and couplings. Use for all feeders larger than 2 1/2" in size or when installed above grade.
inside and out by electro galvanized process. Baked clear elastic enamel coating in and out. Use for installations in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro galvanized
steel strip. Use for final connections to all motor operated equipment such as unit heaters, fans, air handling units, pumps and connections to dry type transformer, connections from junction boxes to lighting fixtures in accessible ceiling, and for wiring within casework and millwork.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip,
with water and oil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connection to equipment listed in paragraph "D" above when located in wet areas.
F. PVC Conduit: Conduit shall be Carlon PV-Duit, Type 40, 90 deg.C. Conduit shall be composed
of Polyvinyl Chloride and shall conform to NEMA Standards. Conduit, fittings and cement shall be produced by the same manufacturer. May be used where installed in earth fill or in poured concrete walls, columns, floors, or under concrete slab. PVC shall not be installed above grade, transition to rigid conduit for any conduit above grade.
G. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): May be used as approved by code where rigid conduit is
specified, except shall not be used for conduit buried in earth fill. 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Rigid Conduit Fittings: Threaded, galvanized malleable iron or heavy steel, water and concrete
tight. Grounding type nylon insulated bushings for connectors at cabinets, boxes and gutters. B. Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel, water and
concrete tight where exposed to wet locations or imbedded in concrete. Steel set screw type acceptable in all dry location applications.
C. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Squeeze or screw type galvanized malleable iron or steel with
nylon insulated throats. D. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel, with watertight gaskets,
"O" ring and retainer, and nylon insulated throats. E. Condulet Fittings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be condulet type for all sharp turns, tees, etc.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3
F. Observe National Electrical Code requirements for insulated bushings on 1-1/4 inch and larger
conduits. Double locknuts and fibre bushings with threads fully engaged are required. 1-1/4 inch and larger EMT connectors, if used, must also accommodate insulated bushings with threads fully engaged. T & B "Insuline" or Appleton insulated throat connectors are acceptable in lieu of separate bushings.
2.03 WALL OUTLET BOXES A. General: Boxes shall be Raco, Steel City, Appleton or equal, catalog numbers based on Raco,
unless otherwise indicated. In general, the type of boxes shall be as follows:
1. Surface Mounted Wall Outlets: Use 4" square by 1-1/2" deep box #182 with raised cover.
2. Outlets Installed Outdoors or in Wet Locations:
a. Non-dedicated Equipment ("WP"): Use Bell Electrical Product 200 Series outlet
boxes and covers. b. Dedicated Equipment ("WPD"): Use Bell Electric Product 200 Series outlet boxes
with Intermatic WP1020 outdoor outlet covers. Boxes to be die cast aluminum with smooth seamless walls and threaded and reinforced connection outlets. Finish to be baked enamel gray. Covers to be made of clear, UV stabilized polycarbonate, hinged at the top with a securing tab at the bottom. Gaskets shall be provided to mount between outlet boxes and cover/base assemblies.
2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installation shall be raintight. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAY A. Support conduit raceway systems in accordance with requirements as set forth in the National
Electric Code. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation
work. 3.03 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION A. Outlet boxes shall be installed for all fixtures, switches, receptacles and other devices. B. Approximate locations of outlets are shown on the plans, but each outlet location as shown shall
be checked by Contractor before installing the outlet box.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
[BLANK PAGE]
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1
SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -
General Requirements and Section 26 00 10 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall provide identification for wiring systems and equipment as called for in this
section. B. Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following:
1. Exposed conduit color banding. 2. Cable conductor identification. 3. Operational instructions and warnings. 4. Equipment/system identification signs.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical
marking and labeling identification systems. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers
for wiring and equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories
and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.
B. Plasticized Tags
1. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention and operational tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing approximately 3-1/4" x 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording.
C. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs
1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, in sizes and thickness indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black and white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.
a. Thickness: 1/16", for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" lengths; 1/8" for larger units. b. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent
adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Cable/Conductor Identification
1. General: Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires of more than one circuit or communication/signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents and similar previously established identification for project electrical work.
B. Operational Identification and Warnings
1. General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosures. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.
C. Equipment/System Identification
1. General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work.
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities.
2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best
convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1
SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -
General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install
lighting panelboards and distribution panelboards as specified in this section and as called for on the drawings.
B. Types of panelboards and enclosures in this section include the following:
1. Lighting and appliance panelboards. 2. Power distribution panelboards.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to panelboards and
accessories, and enclosures; provide units which have been UL-listed and labeled. B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets and
cutout boxes. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 volt maximum)", Pub. No. 1, "Panelboards", and installation portion of Pub. No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less".
1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and
general recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing
accurately scaled layouts of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground-fault circuit interrupters and accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following:
1. General Electric (to match existing in facility)
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2
2.02 PANELBOARDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and components, of
types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation.
1. All Multi-Section Panels: Same dimensions. 2. Provide two keys for each panel. 3. Provide copper ground bar. 4. All panels shall have a designed short circuit rating label.
B. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards:
1. Panelboard bus structure and main lugs or main breakers shall have current ratings as shown on the panelboard schedule. Such ratings shall be established by heat rise tests, conducted in accordance with UL Standard 67. Bussing shall be distributed phase sequence type.
2. The bus assembly shall be enclosed in a steel cabinet. Wiring gutter space shall be in
accordance with UL Standard 67 for panelboards. The rigidity and gauge of steel to comply with UL Standard 50 cabinets. Provisions for additional circuit breakers shall be such that field addition to connectors or mounting hardware will not be required to add circuit breakers to the panelboards.
3. If ground-fault interrupting breakers (GFI), switched neutral or other special types of
breakers require additional pole spaces, size of panel shall be increased accordingly to give the scheduled numbers of poles for spare breakers and blank spaces.
4. Fronts shall include doors and have flush, stainless steel, cylinder tumbler-type locks with
catches and spring-loaded door pulls. The flush lock shall not protrude beyond the front of the door. All panelboard locks shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall have adjustable indicating trim ring clamps which shall be completely concealed steel hinges. Fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. A circuitry directory frame and card with a clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of the door.
5. Terminals for feeder conductors to the panelboard mains and neutral shall be UL listed
as suitable for conductor specified.
6. Each panelboard, as a complete unit, shall have a short circuit current rating equal to or greater than the integrated equipment rating shown on the panelboard schedule. Series connected interrupting ratings are not acceptable. This short circuit current rating shall be established by testing with the overcurrent devices mounted on the panelboard. The short circuit tests on the overcurrent devices and on the panelboard structure shall be made simultaneously by connecting the fault to each overcurrent device with the panelboard connected to its rated voltage source. Method of testing shall be per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 67. The source shall be capable of applying the specified panelboard short circuit current or greater. Testing of panelboard overcurrent devices for short circuit rating only while individually mounted is not acceptable. Also, testing of the bus structure by applying a fixed fault to the bus structure alone is not acceptable. Panelboards shall be marked with their maximum short circuit current rating at the supply voltage and shall be UL listed.
7. Bus Bar: Aluminum or Copper. 8. Panelboards shall have door-in-door covers.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3
2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of
types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation.
B. Circuit Breakers - Branch Circuit Panelboards:
1. Branch circuit breakers up to 150 amperes shall be Square D Type Q0, Q1 or equal. Breakers shall be -on type toggle action with quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between on and off when the breaker is tripped and by a highly visible red tripped circuit indicator. All multi-pole breakers shall be single-operated handle, internal common trip. Breakers having handle ties but not factory labeled "common trip" will be rejected. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking. Tandem or "piggyback" breakers providing two circuits from one pole space are prohibited.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS A. General: Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
B. Securely anchor panelboards to structure and make feeder and branch circuit connections as
indicated in specifications and on the drawings. C. Each panelboard directory shall be typewritten to identify the load fed by each circuit. Spare
breakers and circuits to be left blank with circuit breaker in off position.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
[BLANK PAGE]
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LIGHTING 26 50 00-1
SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. The requirements of Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -
General Requirements and Section 26 0010 - Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Provide lighting fixtures, accessories, labor and supervision necessary to install complete lighting
system as required by the drawings and this section. B. Types of lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
1. Solid State (LED) 2. Exterior Luminaires
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and construction in building
lighting fixtures. B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standard publications
pertaining to lighting equipment. C. Listings: Provide lighting fixtures which have been listed and labeled. Listing or labeling shall be
by UL, ETL Intertek or other nationally recognized agency. D. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast
Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on interior building lighting fixtures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each
fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Shop drawing booklet shall include lamp and ballast data sheets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers shall be as listed in the light fixture schedule on the drawings.
B. Basis of Design Product: The design for each luminaire is based on the product named and
described in the light fixture schedule on the drawings. Provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the equivalent manufacturers listed. Equivalent manufacturers shall match the basis of design product in both form and function. The Architect and Engineer have the final acceptance of equivalent products. Where equivalent products are not determined to match the basis of design, the basis of design product shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Upon request, equivalent manufacturers shall submit lighting calculations and ies files to prove performance of product and samples for table top viewing.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LIGHTING 26 50 00-2
2.02 SOLID STATE LIGHTING / LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES (Greater than 20W) A. General:
1. Luminaire manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years’ experience in the
manufacture and design of LED products and systems. 2. All LED sources used in the LED luminaire shall be of proven quality from established
and reputable LED manufacturers. Acceptable LED lamp manufacturers unless otherwise noted are: a. Cree, Inc. b. Philips Lighting c. Nichia Corporation d. Norlux e. Opto Technology, Inc. f. Osram Optronic Semiconductors g. Samsung
B. LED Warranty
1. Luminaire manufacturer provide a five (5) year written warranty.
C. Replacement and Spares:
1. Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of the following: a. Manufacturer shall be able to provide compatible replacement parts that are
designed to fit into original luminaire for ten (10) years. b. Replacement LED array/module shall be within 3 MacAdam color ellipse, within
10% of lumen output, 7% of correlated color temperature (CCT) and equivalent distribution of original array/module.
c. Replacement LED array/module shall utilize equal to or less than amount of wattage of original array/module.
2. LED driver and array/module shall be replaceable in field.
D. Products and Components – Performance:
1. All LED components shall be mercury-free and lead-free. 2. LEDs shall comply with ANSI/NEMA/ANSLG C78.377-2008 – Specifications for the
Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products. Color shall remain stable throughout the life of the light source.
3. LEDs shall comply with IESNA LM-80 – Standards for Lumen Maintenance of LED Lighting Products.
4. LEDs shall have a minimum rated source life of 50,000 hours under normal operating conditions or as noted on the lighting fixture schedule. LED “rated source life” is defined as the time when a minimum of 70% of initial lumen output remains, as defined by IESNA LM-70.
5. Luminaire assembly shall include a method of dissipating heat so as to not degrade life of source, electronic equipment, or lenses. LED luminaire housing shall be designed to transfer heat from the LED board to the outside environment. Luminaire housing shall have no negative impact on life of components. Upon request, manufacturer shall provide junction temperature limitations and test reports of installed LED in fixture.
6. Method of dissipating heat shall be passive, active cooling systems are not allowed. 7. High power LED luminaires shall be thermally protected using one or more of the
following thermal management techniques: metal core board, gap pad, and/or internal monitoring firmware.
8. LEDs shall be adequately protected from moisture or dust in interior applications.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LIGHTING 26 50 00-3
9. For wet and damp use, LED-based luminaires itself shall be sealed, rated, and tested for
appropriate environmental conditions, not accomplished by using an additional housing or enclosure. Such protection shall have no negative impact on rated life of source or components, or if so, such reductions shall be explicitly brought to the attention of the designer.
10. All hardwired connections to LED luminaires shall be reverse polarity protected and provide high voltage protection in the event connections are reversed or shorted during the installation process.
11. Manufacturer shall provide Luminaire Efficacy (lm/W), total luminous flux (lumens), luminous intensity (candelas) chromaticity coordinates, CCT and CRI. Optical performance, polar diagrams, and relevant luminance and illuminance photometric data. Provide data in IES file format in accordance with IES LM-79-2008, based on test results from an independent Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. Provide information upon special request.
E. LED drivers shall meet the following requirements: 1. Drivers shall have a minimum efficiency of 85%. 2. Minimum/Maximum Ambient Temperature: -20˚C/55˚C interior locations, -40˚C/55˚C
exterior locations, 3. Input Voltage: 120 to 277 (±10%) V or as scheduled. 4. Power Supplies: Class I or II output. 5. Dimming Type: 0-10V control with current source driver, current sinking drivers are not
allowed. 6. Surge Protection for exterior fixtures: The system must survive 250 repetitive strikes of
“C Low” (C Low: 6kV/1.2 x 50 μs, 10kA/8 x 20 μs) waveforms at 1-minute intervals with less than 10% degradation in clamping voltage. “C Low” waveforms are as defined in IEEE/ASNI C62.41.2-2002, Scenario 1 Location Category C.
7. Power Factor (PF): ≥ 0.90. 8. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): ≤ 20%. 9. Comply with FCC Title 47 CFR Part 18 Non-consumer RFI/EMI Standards. 10. Drivers shall be reduction of hazardous substances (ROHS)-compliant. 11. Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF): 100,000 hours based on 90% survival.
2.03 LAMPS A. Lamps shall be General Electric, Philips, Osram-Sylvania. B. Furnish lamps for all fixtures as per schedule on drawings. C. All incandescent lamps shall be 130 volt rated and fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type
where applicable. 2.04 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES A. General:
1. Poles shall be as shown on the drawings, and as specified. The pole and arm assembly
shall be designed for wind loading of 100 mph with an additional 30% gust factor, supporting luminaire(s) and accessories such as shields, banner arms, and banners.
2. Poles shall have handhole having a minimum clear opening of 2.5 x 5 in. Handhole covers shall be secured by stainless steel captive screws.
3. Provide a steel-grounding stud opposite handhole openings, designed to prevent electrolysis when used with copper wire.
4. Provide a base cover that matches the pole in material and color to conceal the mounting hardware pole-base welds and anchor bolts. Plastic base covers are not allowed.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
LIGHTING 26 50 00-4
5. Hardware and Accessories: All necessary hardware and specified accessories shall be the product of the pole manufacturer.
6. Provide manufacturer's standard finish and color, as scheduled on the drawings. Provide custom finishes only where specifically indicated on the drawings.
B. Pole Types:
1. Existing.
C. Foundations for Poles:
1. Foundations shall be cast-in-place concrete, having 3000 psi minimum 28-day
compressive strength. (pre-cast concrete bases are prohibited) 2. Place concrete in spirally-wrapped treated paper forms for round foundations, and
construct forms for square foundations. 3. Rub-finish and round all above-grade concrete edges to approximately 0.25 in radius. 4. Anchor bolt assemblies and reinforcing of concrete foundations shall be as shown on the
drawings. Anchor bolts shall be in a welded cage or properly positioned by the tie wire to stirrups.
5. Prior to concrete pour, install ground electrode. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires and their
mounting provisions on the pole. Install poles plumb and level.
B. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by pole manufacturer.
C. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level recommended by pole manufacturer.
D. Coordinate locations and elevations of base mounted site fixtures with site plans, do not scale electrical drawings for placement of light poles.
END OF SECTION 26 50 00
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1
SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities as shown on demolition plan. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities and temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for field engineering and surveying. 3. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition of buildings, structures, and site
improvements.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.
B. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.
C. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawing.
D. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.
1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP
A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.
1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each tree or
other plants designated to remain.
B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Utility Locator Service: Notify “Iowa One Call” for area where Project is located before site clearing.
C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place.
D. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Fill."
1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 3
B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Wrap a 1-inch blue vinyl tie tape flag around each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.
C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and the SWPPP and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."
B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.
3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, and protect existing utilities on site.
B. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
C. Removal of underground utilities is included in Division 33 Sections.
3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.
1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches below
exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site.
B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.
1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 12 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SITE CLEARING 311000 - 4
3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING
A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.
B. Strip topsoil to depth of approximately 8 to 10 inches (or as indicated in the Boring Logs) in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.
1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.
C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.
1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 12 feet. 2. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled
or reused. 3. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re-spreading deeper topsoil.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
GRADING 312200 - 1
SECTION 312200 – GRADING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Rough grading the site for site structures and building pads. B. Replacement of topsoil and finish grading for planting.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing. B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Filling and compaction. D. Section 32 9223 - Sodding: Finish ground cover. E. Section 32 9300 - Plants: Topsoil in beds and pits.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain. B. Protect plants, lawns, and other features to remain as a portion of final landscaping. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and curbs
from grading equipment and vehicular traffic.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site. 1. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.
B. Other Fill Materials: See Section 31 2323.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Stake and flag locations of known utilities. C. Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
GRADING 312200 - 2
3.03 ROUGH GRADING
A. Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded. B. Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture content. C. When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe. D. See Section 31 2323 for filling procedures. E. Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.
3.04 SOIL REMOVAL and STOCKPILING
A. Stockpile excavated topsoil on site. B. Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site. C. Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion.
3.05 FINISH GRADING
A. Before Finish Grading: 1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected. 2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.
B. Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products.
C. Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. D. In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 6 inches. E. Place topsoil in areas where seeding, sodding, and planting are indicated. F. Place topsoil where required to level finish grade. G. Except as specifically indicated otherwise, place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses:
1. Areas to be Seeded with Grass: 6 inches minimum. 2. Areas to be Sodded: 6 inches minimum. 3. Shrub Beds: 12 inches minimum. See Landscape Plan for details and compost requirements.
H. Place topsoil during dry weather. I. Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading. J. Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage. K. Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of
subgrade. L. Lightly compact placed topsoil.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
GRADING 312200 - 3
B. Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water. B. Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXCAVATION 312316 - 1
SECTION 312316 – EXCAVATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Excavating for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building. B. Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Soil removal from surface of site. B. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Grading. C. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting. D. Section 33 4600 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. E. Section 01575.13 – Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. B. Protect plants, lawns, and other features to remain. C. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and
curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements.
3.03 EXCAVATING
A. Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations. B. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until
notified to resume work. C. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. D. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
EXCAVATION 312316 - 2
E. Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities. F. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. G. Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see Section 31
2323. H. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.
I. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. J. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31
2200. K. Remove excess excavated material from site.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.
B. Provide for visual inspection of load-bearing excavated surfaces before placement of foundations. C. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no
cost to College Community School District.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil stability. B. Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
FILL 312323 - 1
SECTION 312323 – FILL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filling, backfilling, and compacting for footings, slabs-on-grade, paving, site structures, and utilities within the building.
B. Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. B. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used. C. Section 33 4600 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. D. Section 01 5713 - Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Slope protection and erosion
control.
1.03 PRICE & PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A. See Section 01 2000. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2007.
B. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System); 2006. C. ASTM D2922 Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth); 2006. D. ASTM D3012 Standard Test Method for Thermal-Oxidative Stability of Polypropylene Using a
Specimen Rotator Within an Oven; 2006. E. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils;
2005.
1.05 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
FILL 312323 - 2
C. Fill Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. No area is available to store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site and conforming to the following: 1. Low-plasticity, cohesive type. a. Liquid Limit: Less than 45 percent. b. Plasticity Index: Less than 25 percent. 2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. 3. Conforming to ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol CL.
B. Blended Aggregate Fill: Dense angular crushed stone; IDOT Standard Specification Section 4123, gradation number 14 as indicated on drawings.
C. Granular Drainage Fill: Angular crushed washed stone; open-graded, processed aggregate; free of
shale, clay, friable material and debris; and conforming to the following: 1. IOWA DOT Gradation 29, Section 4131.
D. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter.
1. Grade in accordance with ASTM D 2487 Group Symbol SW.
D. Aggregate Bedding shall meet the following gradation:
Sieve Size: 1 ½ 1 ¾ ½ 3/8 4 8 Percent Passing: 100 95-100 50-100 20-65 10-65 0-20 0-8 F. Topsoil: See Section 31 2200.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Geotextile Filter Fabric: See Section 33 4600.
2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
FILL 312323 - 3
B. Where fill materials are specified by reference to a specific standard, test and analyze samples for compliance before delivery to site.
C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. E. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. See Section 31 2200 for additional requirements. C. See Section 003100 for Geotechnical Report recommendations. D. Verify subdrainage, dampproofing, or waterproofing installation has been inspected. E. Verify structural ability of unsupported walls to support imposed loads by the fill.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Scarify and proof roll subgrade surface to a depth of 8 inches moisture condition and compact to the minimum specified percent compaction.
B. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. C. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. D. Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.03 FILLING
A. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated. B. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. C. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or
spongy subgrade surfaces. D. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. E. Granular / Aggregate Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6
inches compacted depth. F. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted
depth. G. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual
grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. H. Correct areas that are over-excavated.
1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: See Structural Specifications. 2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 98 percent of
maximum dry density.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
FILL 312323 - 4
I. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 95 percent of maximum dry density
unless within one foot of final subgrade elevation, then 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Under lawn areas: 90 percent of maximum dry density.
J. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A. Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated. B. Subgrade Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade:
1. Scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subsoil to 98 percent of its maximum dry density before placing additional fill.
2. Use general fill at optimum moisture as replacement for unsatisfactory subsoil materials. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevations below capilliary barrier. 4. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density.
C. Over Buried Utility Piping, Conduits, and Duct Bank in Trenches: 1. Bedding and Haunching Layers: Use Aggregate Bedding Material. 2. Cover with general fill except storm sewer under pavement shall be backfilled with granular
drainage fill to bottom of subgrade elevation. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 98 percent of maximum dry density under paved areas and
to 90% off maximum dry density under lawn areas.
D. At Lawn Areas: 1. Use general fill. 2. Fill up to 6 inches below finish grade elevations. 3. Compact to 90 percent of maximum dry density. 4. See Section 31 2200 for topsoil placement.
E. Under Monolithic Paving: 1. Scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subsoil to 98 percent of its maximum dry
density before placing additional fill. 2. Use additional general fill as required to achieve final subgrade elevation.
a. Maximum compacted depth of each lift: 8 inches. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density unless within one foot of final subgrade elevation, then 98 percent of maximum dry density.
3. See Section 32 1123 for aggregate base course placed over fill. 4. Use sand leveling base under concrete sidewalks.
a. Compacted depth: 2 inches, minimum. b. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A. Top Surface of General Filling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Filling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
FILL 312323 - 5
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.
B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556. C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in
accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: Comply with recommendations of geotechnical engineer. F. Proof roll compacted fill at surfaces that will be under slabs-on-grade.
G. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no
cost to OWNER.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove unused materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition, properly prepared for subsequent grading operations.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333-1
SECTION 312333 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trenching, backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 31 2316 - Excavation: Building and foundation excavating. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Backfilling at building and foundations. C. Section 33 3111 - Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping. D. Section 33 4111 - Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping. E. Section 33 4600 - Subdrainage: Filter aggregate and filter fabric for foundation drainage systems. 1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3).
B. ASTM D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-
Cone Method; 2000. 1.04 DEFINITIONS
A. Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings. B. Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3300 - Construction Submittals, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. File Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials
used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Provide sufficient quantities of fill to meet project schedule and requirements. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B. When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where designated. 1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333-2
C. Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated. D. Protect plants, lawns, and other features to remain. E. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, fences, sidewalks, paving, and
curbs from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
1. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris. B. Blended Aggregate Fill: See Section 31 2323. C. Granular Drainage Fill: See Section 31 2323. D. Aggregate Bedding Materials: See Section 31 2323.
E. Topsoil: See Section 31 2200 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Filter Fabric: As specified in Section 33 4600 - Subdrainage. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of soil material.
B. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations. B. Locate, identify, and protect utilities that remain and protect from damage. C. See Section 31 2200 and 31 2323 for additional requirements. 3.02 TRENCHING A. Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. B. Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored. C. Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. D. Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333-3
E. Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter. F. Remove large stones and other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. G. Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site. H. Stockpile excavated material to be re-used in area designated on site in accordance with Section 31 2200. I. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT A. Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill. B. Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material. C. Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B. Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated.
C. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work. D. Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces. E. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density. F. Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in equal continuous layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted depth. G. Soil Fill: Place and compact material in equal continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches compacted depth. H. Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10ft, unless noted otherwise. Make gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas. I. Correct areas that are over-excavated.
1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Use structural fill compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density.
2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97 percent of maximum dry density.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 312333-4
J. Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 98 percent of maximum dry density.
2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density. K. Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic. 3.05 BEDDING AND FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A. Utility Piping for water, gas, electrical distribution, storm and sanitary piping: 1. Bedding and Haunching Layers: Aggregate Bedding Material. 2. HDPE Storm Sewer shall have Aggregate material to 12” above top of pipe. 3. Cover with general fill except storm sewer under pavement shall be backfilled with granular
drainage fill to bottom of subgrade elevation. 4. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 5. Compact in maximum 6 inch lifts to 98 percent of maximum dry density.
B. Over Subdrainage Piping at Foundation Perimeter and Under Slabs: 1. Granular drainage fill and geotextile fabric: Section 33 4600. 2. Cover drainage fill with general fill. 3. Fill up to subgrade elevation. 4. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density.
3.06 TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of General Backfilling: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. B. Top Surface of Backfilling Under Paved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch from required elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 4000 • Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing. B. Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM 01556.
C. Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor").
D. Frequency of Tests: As recommended by geotechnical engineer.
E. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to City of Coralville, Iowa.
3.08 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove unused stockpiled materials; leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 1
SECTION 321123 - AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate base course for vehicular pavement and tennis courts
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 31 2200 - Grading: Preparation of site for base course. B. Section 31 2323 - Fill: Compacted fill under base course. C. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving: Finish concrete surface course.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3; 2007.
B. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System); 2006. C. ASTM D 4318 - Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils;
2005. D. IDOT Standard Specifications Section 4121, Gradation 12 (Granular Subbase).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Materials Sources: Submit name of imported materials source. C. Aggregate Composition Test Reports: Results of laboratory tests on proposed and actual materials
used. D. Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need. B. When aggregate materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing. 2. Prevent contamination. 3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Blended Aggregate: IOWA DOT Gradation 14, Section 4123.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 2
B. Granular Drainage Fill: IOWA DOT Gradation 29, Section 4131.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis of aggregate materials.
B. Test and analyze aggregate samples for compliance before delivery to site. C. If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest. D. Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate has been inspected, gradients and elevations are correct, and is dry.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Correct irregularities in substrate gradient and elevation by scarifying, reshaping, and re-compacting. B. Do not place aggregate on soft, muddy, or frozen surfaces. C. Proof-roll with loaded tandem axle dump truck D. Areas where unsuitable conditions exist should be repaired by removing and replacing the unsuitable
materials with properly compacted fill.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Place aggregate base over compacted subgrade to a minimum compacted thickness of 6 inches. B. Compact to 98 percent of maximum dry density. C. Level and contour surfaces to elevations and gradients indicated. D. Add small quantities of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate as appropriate to assist compaction. E. Add water to assist compaction. If excess water is apparent, remove aggregate and aerate to reduce
moisture content. F. Use mechanical tamping equipment in areas inaccessible to compaction equipment.
3.04 TOLERANCES
A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. C. Variation From Design Elevation: Within 1/4 inch.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 321123 - 3
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and testing.
B. Compaction density testing will be performed on compacted aggregate base course in accordance
with ASTM D1556. C. Results will be evaluated in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material
in accordance with ASTM D 698 ("standard Proctor"). D. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. E. Frequency of Tests: In accordance with requirements of Geotechnical Engineer, but no fewer than
one for each 500 sf.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ASPHALT COURT PAVING 321216.13 1
SECTION 321216.13 – ASPHALT COURT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Aggregate base course.
B. Single course bituminous concrete paving.
C. Double course bituminous concrete paving.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 312200 – Grading: Preparation of site for paving and base.
B. Section 312323 – Fill: Compacted subgrade for paving.
C. Section 321123 – Aggregate Base Courses; Aggregate base courses.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. AI MS-2 – Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types: The Asphalt Institute; 1997.
B. AI MS-19 – A Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manuel; The Asphalt Institute; Fourth Edition.
C. ASTM D946 – Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction; 2009a.
D. Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, current edition.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Iowa Highways standard.
B. Mixing Plant: Conform to State of Iowa Highways standards.
C. Obtain materials from same source throughout.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ASPHALT COURT PAVING 321216.13 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate for Base Course: In accordance with State of Iowa Highways standards. Type B Asphalt Mix with ¾ inch maximum aggregate size.
B. Aggregate for Binder Course: In accordance with State of Iowa Highways standards and ASTM D 946. PG 58-28 or PG 64-22.
C. Aggregate for Wearing Course: In accordance with State of Iowa Highways standards.
D. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with State of Iowa Highways standards.
E. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles or limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of foreign matter.
F. Tack Coat: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt.
2.2 ASPHALT PAVING MIXES AND MIX DESIGN
A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.
B. Base Course: 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI MS-2.
C. Binder Course: 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI MS-2.
D. Wearing Course: 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with AI MS-2.
E. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of work.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test mix design and samples in accordance with IDOT Standard specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.
B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct.
3.2 BASE COURSE
A. Place and compact base course.
B. See Section 321123.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
ASPHALT COURT PAVING 321216.13 3
3.3 PREPARATION – TACK COAT
A. Apply tack coat in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces over subgrade surface at uniform rate of 1/3 gal/sq yd.
3.4 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT – SINGLE COURSE
A. Install Work in accordance with State of Iowa Highways standards.
B. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.
C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.
3.5 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT – DOUBLE COURSE
A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.
B. Place wearing courses within two hours of placing and compacting binder course.
C. Compact pavement by rolling to specified density. Do no displace or extrude pavement from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.
D. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Slope: Asphalt courts shall be sloped side to side in a true plane at plan grade, 0.90%.
B. Planarity: The surface shall be constructed as designed in one true plane. The surface also must be located at the designed elevation and slope because the elevation and grade of the surface tie it into the drainage system. The finished court should not vary more than +/- 3/8” from the designed elevation within the Primary Playing Area.
C. Evenness: In order to drain properly and to be acceptable for play, a surface must be smooth and regular, lacking humps and dips. An even surface will not cause ball deflection or create player trip hazard. As a measure of evenness, the surface should not vary more than ¼” in 10’ when measured in any direction using a straightedge.
D. Small Irregularities: No deviation in the asphalt surface greater than 1/8” in 18”. Small deviations over a large distance that fall within the evenness standard will not affect player movement or ball bounce, but small deviations over a short distance, such as those caused by irregular seams, expanded aggregate or roller mark, affect play.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1
SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Pavement
B. Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) Curbs and Gutters
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Includes the requirements for the construction of full depth Portland Cement Concrete (PCC) pavement, and concrete curbs and gutters placed upon a prepared or
corrected subgrade or previously constructed base or subbase. See Division 31 – Fill and Grading for sub-grade and subbase construction specifications. This section shall
also include final subgrade/subbase preparation for concrete paving.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Follow the General Provisions (Requirements) and Covenants, as well as the following: A. PCC Mix Design: Mixes are Class C as defined in Iowa DOT Section
2301 and Materials I.M. 529. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, maturity method for strength determination prior to opening to traffic will be allowed. 1. Two weeks prior to commencing any portland concrete placement, the Contractor shall
submit a paving mix design for each different source of aggregate to be used for review and approval by the Engineer. Mixes or mix designs approved by the Iowa Department of Transportation or an independent testing laboratory shall be submitted.
1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS
Follow the General Provisions (Requirements) and Covenants. 1.05 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS
Follow the General Provisions (Requirements) and Covenants as well as the following: Complete elements of the work that can affect line and grade in advance of other open cut construction unless noted on plans.
1.06 RESTRICTIONS ON OPERATIONS
The following shall apply unless specifically modified by the Engineer. A. Weather Conditions:
1. Do not place concrete when stormy or inclement weather or temperature prevents good workmanship. Aggregates containing frozen lumps shall not be placed, and concrete shall not be placed on a frozen subgrade or subbase. The contractor will take all necessary actions to prevent the pavement from freezing. a. Concrete placement may commence if the concrete mix temperature is a minimum of
40° and the air temperature is: 1) After November 15, the air temperature is 36° and rising. 2) After April 15, the air temperature is 32° and rising.
b. Concrete placement will stop when:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 2
1) After November 15, the air temperature is 37° and falling. 2) After April 15, the air temperature is 32° and falling. 3) With non-reinforced pavement, calcium chloride may be added to the mixing water to hasten initial set, if approved by Engineer. 4) Pavement damaged by inclement weather shall be removed and replaced.
c. For warm weather, restrictions on concrete placement see SUDAS Section 7010, 1.07, D.
B. Cold Weather Temperature Protection: 1. All concrete pavement and curb/gutters, including exposed edges of the slab and curb,
shall be cured. In addition, concrete less than 36 hours old shall be protected as follows:
Night Temperature Forecast Type of Protection1 35°F to 32°F One layer of burlap for concrete.
31°F to 25°F Two layers of burlap or one layer of plastic on
one layer of burlap.
Below 25°F
Four layers of burlap between layers of 4 mil (100 μm) plastic or equivalent commercial insulat-
ing material approved by the Engineer.
1 The protection shall remain until one of the following conditions is met: a. The pavement is 5 calendar days old. b. Opening strength is attained. c. Forecasted low temperatures exceed 35°F for the next 48 hours. d. Forecasted high temperatures exceed 55°F for the next 24 hours and subgrade temperatures are above 40°F.
a. Paving operations shall be shut down in time to comply with protection requirements
outlined above. In good weather, the header shall be placed at least 45 minutes before sunset. During cold weather, more time must be allowed for finishing and protection. All finishing and covering operations shall be performed prior to darkness. Temperature restrictions and protection requirements may be modified by the Engineer.
b. Equivalent commercial insulating material approved by the Engineer may be used. This material shall be waterproof and have a minimum R value of 0.50. If initial set has not yet occurred, a layer of burlap shall be placed on top of concrete prior to placing insulating blankets.
c. Vertical edges of pavement and back of curbs shall be cured by the same method used for curing the surface.
d. Method of protection and materials used shall maintain the concrete above 40°F.
C. Concrete Evaporation Protection: 1. Hot weather condition is defined as any combination of the following conditions that tend
to impair the quality of plastic concrete by accelerating the rate of moisture loss and rate of cement hydration causing thermal shrinkage and resulting in plastic shrinkage cracking or crazing.
• High Ambient Temperature • High Concrete Temperature • Low Relative Humidity
• High Wind Velocity • Solar Radiation
2. Concrete evaporation protection will be based on the theoretical rate of surface
evaporation when it exceeds 0.1 lbs. per square foot per hour. The National Weather Service’s maximum air temperature, relative humidity and maximum steady wind velocity without gusts, for the date and the location of the paving pour shall be used for the
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 3
Theoretical Rate of Evaporation Chart.
3. During hot weather conditions the Engineer may restrict concrete placement to early
morning or evening hours. 4. Under hot weather conditions the Contractor will advise the Engineer of the results of the
theoretical evaporation rate throughout paving operations.
5. The Contractor shall discontinue with placement of the concrete when the theoretical evaporation rate exceeds to 0.30 lbs./sq.ft./hr.
6. The protection practice by the Contractor will be as follows for the evaporation rate greater then 0.1 lbs./sq.ft./hr.
a. Immediately apply an approved evaporation retarder (Polymers) to the concrete pavement and curbs or increase the application cure to 1.5 times the standard specified rate. b. Take special precautions to assure that the forms and subgrade are sufficiently moist or protected to avoid lowering the water content at the pavement/subgrade interface. In hot weather conditions the subgrade should also be moistened the evening before operations. c. Assure that the time between placing and curing is minimized and eliminate delays. d. Moisten concrete aggregates that are dry and absorptive.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 4
e. Use a fog spray to raise the relative humidity of the ambient air if there is a delay in immediately applying the curing compound. f. Minimize solar heat by shading, wetting or covering concrete chutes or other equipment that comes in contact with plastic concrete. g. If shrinkage cracks should appear during finishing the cracks can be closed by striking each side of the crack with a float and refinishing.
D. Rain Protection:
1. The Contractor shall have available, near the site of the work, materials for proper
protection of the edges and surface of concrete. Protective material may consist of sheets of burlap, or plastic film. Planks or other material with suitable stakes that can be used as temporary forms shall also be on hand; Iowa DOT Section 2301.
2. If initial set has not occurred, contractor shall take every precaution necessary to protect the surface texture of the concrete.
3. Failure to properly protect concrete shall constitute cause for removal and replacement of defective pavement, if so determined by the Engineer.
E. Safety Fence for Pavement:
1. At the end of each day's run and at all side streets, the Contractor shall erect and maintain such barriers and fencing as are necessary to protect the pavement from damage.
F. Repair of Pavement:
1. The Contractor shall protect the new pavement and its appurtenances from traffic, both public and that caused by its own employees and agents, at its expense. This includes the erection and maintenance of warning signs, lights, barricades, watchmen to direct traffic, and pavement bridges or crossovers.
2. Any part of the pavement damaged by traffic or other causes occurring prior to final
acceptance of the pavement shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense.
3. The Contractor shall not operate equipment with metal tracks, metal bucket blades, or metal motor patrol blades directly on new paving. The Contractor shall not unload soil or granular materials, including base rock for storage and future reloading directly onto new paving.
G. Utilities Protection: The Contractor will not start work until all utilities are located.
1. Repairs: When the Contractor disrupts or breaks known utilities of the Jurisdiction or privately owned utilities, such utilities shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense. Unnecessary delays in making repairs shall cause the Engineer to have such repairs made and the cost thereof deducted from the monies due the Contractor.
2. Drains, Pipe, Tiles: Existing subsurface drains, pipe, and tiles, which are disrupted or
broken by reason of the construction shall be connected to the storm sewer, or another adequate outlet if storm sewer is not available. Should no outlet be readily available, the Engineer shall determine a suitable solution.
3. Water Stop Boxes and Services: The adjustment of stems and castings and/or repair
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 5
of those broken or damaged by the Contractor shall be at the contractor's expense. Relocation of stop boxes and services shall be by bid items.
H. Use of Pavement: Time for opening pavement for use is determined by age or by test
results from cylinder or beams taken during placement. Minimum Age or Strength of Pavement Before Opening
Class of Mix Type of Cement Minimum Age For Opening without
Testing 4
Minimum Compressive Strength (psi)
Minimum Flexural Strength Center
Point1 (psi)
A Type I 14 Days 2 3,000 500 B Type I 14 Days 2,400 400 C Type I 7 Days 3,000 500 C Type III 48 Hours 3,000 500 M Type I 48 Hours 3,000 500
1 Optional test method for primary roads 2 Ten days for concrete 8 inches or more in thickness 3 Five days for concrete 9 inches or more in thickness 4 Opening without testing only allowed upon approval of Engineer Note: Maturity Method may be allowed with approval of the Engineer; Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 383 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 TYPE OF PAVEMENT
Concrete pavement shall be one of two types, standard or slip form.
A. Standard Concrete Pavement: Standard concrete pavement may be reinforced, or nonreinforced, as noted in the contract documents and shall consist of concrete of the class specified in the contract documents, reinforced as shown in the contract documents, placed within forms, and consolidated and finished by equipment operating on forms.
B. Slip Form Pavement: Slip form pavement may be reinforced, or nonreinforced, and shall consist of concrete of the class specified in the contract documents, reinforced as shown in the contract documents, placed, consolidated, and finished without the use of fixed forms.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement; Iowa DOT Section 4101 and Materials I.M. 401
1. Type I; Normal Portland Cement: a. Unless otherwise specified, cement shall meet Type I AASHTO M 85, Type I. b. When the addition of fly ash to Type I cement is allowed in accordance with Iowa
DOT Section 2301, or AASHTO M 240, Type I (PM) or Type IP, cement may be furnished and used within the same limitations.
c. The cement content of the concrete shall be that specified for Type I cement.
d. Use IDOT Class C-3 Mix
B. Mineral Additives:
1. Fly Ash Substitute: a. Flyash per Iowa DOT Specifications for highway and Bridge Construction Section 4108 may be substituted for cement at the rates specified in section 2301.04E after notification and authorization by the owner’s representative.
C. Fine Aggregate for Concrete, Iowa DOT Section 4110: Clean, hard, durable mineral aggregate particles free from detrimental amount of silt, shale, coal, or organic matters.
1. Natural sand as a result from disintegration of rock through erosional processes.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 6
2. From an approved source of not more than 2% shale and coal particles retained on a No. 16 sieve; not more than 2.5% silt by weight.
Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 inch 100 No. 4 90 to 100 No. 8 70 to 100 No. 30 10 to 60 No. 200 0 to 1.5
Engineer may adjust gradation to allow for use of local aggregates.
D. Coarse Aggregate for Concrete, Iowa DOT Section 4115: Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone particles.
1. Abrasion loss, in accordance with AASHTO T 96 shall not exceed 50.
2. Freeze and thaw loss, in accordance with Iowa DOT Test Method 211, Method A, shall not exceed 6%.
3. Objectionable Materials: The percentage of such materials shall not exceed the following percentages:
Objectionable Materials Percent Clay lumps 0.5 Coal and carbonaceous shale 0.5 Total of all shale, similar objectionable materials, and coal combined.
1.0
Sticks (wet weight) and other organic materials, ex-cept coal.
0.1
Unsound chert particles retained on 3/8" sieve (Non-structural concrete)
3.0
Unsound chert particles retained on the No. 4 sieve (Gradation No. 6) (1/2" nominal maximum size)
0.5
NOTE: Chert particles which break into three or more pieces when subjected to the freezing and thawing test will be considered unsound. Chert in aggregate produced from limestone sources is defined as unsound when any of the fractions of the crushed or uncrushed chert do not meet the soundness requirements.
4. Durability: Soundness - Iowa DOT Test Method 408-A.
c. Class 2 durability stone shall be used unless stated otherwise in the contract documents or otherwise specified by the Engineer.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 7
No. 200 0 to 1.5 Engineer may adjust gradation to allow for use of local aggregates.
E. Water Requirements: Iowa DOT Section 4102.
F. Air Entrainment Admixture: Iowa DOT Section 4103, Materials I.M. 403, AASHTO M 154. Provisions shall be made to stir, agitate, or circulate air entraining admixtures prior to use so as to insure a uniform and homogeneous mixture.
G. Admixtures: All liquid admixtures as listed below must meet the following requirements. Other admixtures may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer.
1. Retarding and Water Reducing Admixtures: Iowa DOT Section 4103, Materials I.M. 403, AASHTO M 194. 2. Accelerating admixtures (calcium chloride): Iowa DOT Section 2529.
H. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Deformed Bars: Billet steel bar, Iowa DOT Section 4151. a. All deformed bars shall be epoxy coated, Iowa DOT Section 4151. b. Tie bars shall be bent back reasonably straight. Tie bars broken during rebending
shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost by drilling a hole and setting the bar in epoxy. Tie bars shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 615 Grade 40 or 60.
c. All damage to epoxy coated bars shall be repaired by an approved patching material.
I. Metal Keyways: Iowa DOT Section 4191
J. Supports for Reinforcing Steel: Iowa DOT Section 2301.
K. Joint Fillers and Sealers:
1. Contraction Joint Sealers: Material for sealing sawed contraction and center line joints and other joints, as shown in the contract documents, shall meet the following requirements:
a. Poured Joint Sealer: Iowa DOT Section 4136.
2. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler and Sealer: Preformed material for filling expansion joints shall be one of the following types. When the type is not specified, resilient filler shall be used. a. Resilient Filler: Iowa DOT Section 4136, AASHTO M 213. b. Polyethylene Joint Filler: Iowa DOT Section 4136, AASHTO T 42. c. Elastomeric Joint Seals: Iowa DOT Section 4136, AASHTO M 220. d. Preformed Urethane Foam Expansion Joint Filler: Iowa DOT Section 4136,
Materials I.M. 436.
L. Liquid Curing Compounds: Iowa DOT Section 4105, AASHTO M 148.
M. Burlap Covering: Iowa DOT Section 4104.
1. Jute and manilla fibers shall weigh not less than 10 ounces per square yard. 2. Shall be new material or reclaimed material which shall not have a deleterious affect upon fresh concrete.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 8
2.03 MIXES: IOWA DOT Materials I.M. 529
A. Mix Design: Unless otherwise specified, the mix design shall be Class C mix with air entraining.
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum compressive strength of the mix shall be 4,000 pounds per square inch at 28 days.
B. Concrete Mixes: Shall meet the following design targets, as per Iowa DOT Section 2301
and Materials I.M. 529.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 9
As per Iowa DOT Sections 2301, 2511, 2512, 2529, and 2530. * The initial values for fresh concrete listed in the table above account for anticipated air loss during consolidation of concrete during placement and paving. Actual air loss and target value for air content of fresh concrete are established below. ** Prior to addition of Calcium Chloride
C. Use of Fly Ash: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to making concrete mixture
changes which have been approved. Mix proportions for the various mixes using fly ash are included in the Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 529. The following fly ash substitution rates shall replace those given in Iowa DOT Section 2301 and as referenced in Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 529:
Fly Ash Substitution Rates
Time Period Cement Type Fly Ash Substitution Rate by
Weight March 16 through September 14 *** March 16 through September 14 ***
Type I and Type II Type IP and Type I(PM)
Not more than 20% Not more than 5% *
September 15 through October 15 September 15 through October 15
Type I and Type II
Not more than 15%
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 10
Type IP and Type I(PM) None October 16 thru March 15 October 16 thru March 15
Type I, Type II, & Type III Type IP and Type I(PM)**
None None
March 16 thru October 15 Type I, Type II, or Type III used in class M mixtures
Class C fly ash only at not more than 10%
* Note: If the cement manufacturer provides the Engineer with satisfactory concrete strength and freeze-thaw durability test results equivalent to concrete with the same Type IP or Type I(PM) cement without fly ash, the substitution rate may be increased to 10%. The testing and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 401. ** Note: Proportions of Type IP and Type I(PM) shall be increased 15%, by weight, during this time period. *** Note: The March 16 through September 14 substitution rate may be used at any time the maturity method for monitoring concrete strength is utilized. Fly ash shall be transported, stored, hauled, and batched in such a manner to keep it dry. 2.04 MIXING EQUIPMENT
A. Weighing and Proportioning Equipment: Iowa DOT Section 2001.
B. Mixing Equipment: Iowa DOT Section 2001.
C. Material Bins: Iowa DOT Section 2001.
2.05 CONCRETE BATCHING: IOWA DOT Section 2301
A. Plant batching shall be Iowa DOT calibrated and approved. Provide copy of current calibrations and approvals.
2.06 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready Mixed Concrete: Iowa DOT Section 2301.13
B. All Methods: Each truck load shall be identified by a plant charge ticket showing plant name, contractor, project data, quantity, class, time batched, and water added at site.
A. Subgrade Finishing Equipment: Use mechanical excavating equipment designed for this purpose, approved by Engineer. 1. Form line or path area for slip-form paving machine shall be constructed to final grade by
form-line excavating equipment with automatic grade controls.
2. Subgrade between forms or between path areas for slip-form machines constructed to final grade with automatically controlled subgrade excavating machine.
B. Side Forms: Steel, minimum thickness: 5 gage, height at least equal to design thickness of pavement with base width at least 6 inches. 1. Minimum section length: 10 feet, joint connections designed to permit horizontal and
vertical adjustment with locking device to hold abutting sections firmly in alignment.
2. Bracing, support, and staking must prevent deflection or movement of forms.
C. Flexible Forms: Use steel or wood flexible forms for curves with radius less than 100 feet.
1. Bracing, support, and staking must prevent deflection or movement of forms.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 11
2. Forms used to form back of curbs at returns shall have height at least equal to design
thickness of pavement and curb height.
3. Forms must be free from scale and surface irregularities; coat with release agent (see Section 7010, 3.03.G) prior to concrete placement.
D. Consolidating and Finishing Equipment: Fixed form or slip form paving machines
specifically designed for placing, striking off, consolidating, and finishing in single pass to required cross section. 1. Consolidation of concrete by single pass of approved surface, tube, or internal vibrator
operated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Slip form equipment: Automatic horizontal and vertical controls required; equipment must spread concrete to uniform depth prior to finishing.
3. Air screeds and vibrating screeds are approved consolidating and finishing equipment for cul-de-sacs, drives and some intersections. Small runs of pavement up to 250 feet maximum may also require screeds if paving machines are not practical.
4. Equipment subject to approval of Engineer.
E. Hand Finishing Equipment: Contractor shall provide tools including wood or magnesium floats, wood hand floats, point trowels, edgers, or other equipment necessary for proper finishing of concrete. 1. Provide 2 light straightedges, 10 feet long, with handles not less than 12 feet long for use
in detecting irregularities in surface; provide 2 heavy straightedges of similar size for use in correcting surface; provide 2 light straightedges 10 feet long for checking curb and gutter line.
2. Provide approved vibrators for consolidating concrete. 3. Provide metal or wood screed true to crown.
F. Curing Equipment: Use pressure sprayer capable of applying a continuous uniform film of curing compound.
G. Concrete Saws: Power operated concrete saws capable of cutting hardened concrete neatly.
H. Joint Sealing Equipment: Equipment capable of heating and installing sealant in joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL SUBGRADE/SUBBASE PREPARATION
A. Natural Subgrade: 1. Subgrade construction shall be in accordance with Section 31-2323. 2. Subgrade Loading:
a. Where concrete trucks must travel on a prepared soil-type subgrade to unload and, as approved by the Engineer, watering of the subgrade must be limited to just ahead of the paving machine.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 12
b. Repetitive loading on the subgrade by concrete trucks shall be minimized by entering and exiting the subgrade on side streets.
c. Loads in excess of the legal axle load shall not be allowed on the completed subgrade.
d. Partially loaded trucks may be required. e. If subgrade/subbase failure occurs, the repair shall be coordinated with the Engineer.
3. Maintenance of Subgrade: a. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of the completed subgrade during
subsequent construction activities. b. Before allowing hauling equipment to use the completed subgrade, the Contractor
must be satisfied as to the effect this hauling equipment may have on the partially completed work.
B. Granular Subbase:
1. Granular subbase for pavements shall be in accordance with Section 32-1123
2. Should the Contractor who constructed the subbase elect to overbuild the subbase, the paving contractor shall trim down to the design elevation and shape to the final template with an automatically controlled trimming machine.
3. Excess material shall be salvaged and spread for use on any other approved project location or operation.
4. The top 1 inch of the subbase shall be uniformly moist prior to paving. 5. The paving operation shall be suspended where subbase stability has been lost.
3.02 SURFACE FIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
A. Adjust manhole frames and other fixtures within area to be paved to conform to finished surface.
B. Clean outside of fixture to depth of pavement before concrete placement. C. Box out fixtures for later adjustment where allowed. Size and shape of box out for intakes as
shown in Standard Drawings.
3.03 FORMS SETTING
A. Use form line excavating machine to establish subgrade of forms. B. Set base of forms at or below subgrade elevation with top of forms at pavement surface
elevation.
C. Extra height forms with Engineer approval may be used to back up integral curb and paving slab; set base at or below subgrade elevation with top of form at top of curb elevation.
D. Secure forms in place to required grade and alignment. E. If voids occur under forms, remove forms and rework subgrade to proper elevation and
density; reinstall forms. F. If the soil supporting the form is softened by rain or standing water so that form is
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 13
inadequately supported, remove forms and rework subgrade to proper elevation and density; reinstall forms.
G. Coat forms with release agent before concrete is placed. H. Place forms true to alignment and free of latent concrete.
3.04 REINFORCING PLACEMENT
A. Reinforcing metal shall be clean, straight, free from distortion and rust, and shall be firmly secured in position as detailed.
B. All reinforcing metal shall be placed in approved storage to prevent damage; do not distribute
along the work site except as needed to avoid delay in paving.
C. Place reinforcing steel as shown on the detailed drawings or as specified; support and secure bars by approved chair and wire assemblies; bars to be checked by the Engineer upon notification from the Contractor.
D. Joint Steel:
1. Tie bars for all longitudinal joints shall be installed so as to be in the intended position in the completed pavement. Tie bars for all longitudinal joints shall be positioned on chairs and secured against movement with metal stakes during placing and finishing of concrete unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If approved by the Engineer, bars may be placed in position by a machine or other method. For tie steel that is placed mechanically in plastic concrete, the Engineer shall: a. Manually check locations and depth of the steel in the plastic concrete behind the slip
form paver using the following frequencies: once every 200 lineal feet for tangent roadway sections in at least three locations within all horizontal curve sections for each inspection, at least two tie steel locations within a panel
b. Using a magnetic locator, verify locations of tie steel in hardened concrete every day. Check out-of-tolerance tie steel to identify the extent of the problem for a retrofit correction.
2. The Contractor shall provide adequate means to ensure that the load transfer devices and tie bars for key type joints are properly secured to maintain correct position and alignment during the placement of concrete.
E. Dowel Holes: 1. Holes for both deformed and smooth dowel bars shall be drilled into the face of the
existing slab at midpoint.
2. Drills used to make holes shall be held in a rigid frame to assure proper horizontal alignment with misalignment not to exceed 1/4 inch in the vertical or horizontal plane.
3. The equipment used shall be operated so as to prevent damage to the pavement being drilled. The drilling procedure shall be approved by the Engineer. The hole shall be blown clean to eliminate all dust.
4. Dowels shall be epoxied into place in the existing slab. Epoxy bonding compound shall meet requirements of Section 7010, 2.02, P.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 14
3.05 CONSTRUCTION OF JOINTS
A. General:
1. Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be constructed of the type, dimensions, and at the locations required, as described by these specifications, or as detailed by the plans or special provisions.
2. Longitudinal joints shall be coincident with or parallel to the pavement center line unless shown otherwise on the plans.
3. All transverse joints shall be at right angles to the center line and shall extend the full width of the pavement unless otherwise specified.
4. All joint fillers shall be installed as shown in the contract documents.
B. Expansion Joint:
1. Install expansion joints between new pavement construction and the faces of buildings, stoops, existing slabs, and other fixtures and as shown on Standard Drawings. Expansion joints shall be preformed foam expansion joint material. Joints at these locations shall be sealed with a self-leveling polyurethane.
C. Saw Joints:
1. Joint locations shall be chalked with a string line before sawing. 2. Joint dimensions:
a. All transverse contraction joints shall be sawed at a maximum spacing of 12 feet. All joints shall be sawed to a depth as shown on the drawings.
3. In order to prevent shrinkage cracks, sawing shall be commenced promptly after the
pavement has obtained sufficient strength to resist tearing of the concrete adjacent to the joint during the process of sawing.
4. Longitudinal joints shall be sawn within 24 hours of the concrete being placed. 5. If necessary, the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night.
D. Construction Joints:
1. Longitudinal or transverse construction joints shall be placed between adjacent lanes of concrete and at end-of-day header runs.
2. Manhole boxouts shall be located and placed on grade prior to paving. Manhole boxouts are required for two piece castings for sanitary/storm manholes.
3. The longitudinal construction joints shall be an approved key type joint with legs unless machine placed.
3.06 CONCRETE PAVEMENT PLACEMENT
A. Set survey control stakes at 25 foot maximum spacing including high and low points. Additional staking may be required by the Engineer.
B. The concrete shall be placed, consolidated, and finished to the widths and depths outlined in
the plans.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 15
C. Integral curbs shall be poured with the slab in a single paving machine operation. Normal
mainline paving will not have construction joints at integral curbs. D. Concrete shall be deposited to the full depth of the pavement in a single operation. E. Necessary hand spading and spreading shall be done with shovels and not rakes. F. Place concrete to full depth in single operation. Keep a uniform pile of concrete in front of the
paving machine, up to a maximum of 6 to 8 inches above the design surface elevation. G. The concrete shall be distributed and spread as soon as placed. A mechanical concrete
spreader may be used. H. Concrete Screed:
1. The concrete shall then be struck off and screeded by mechanical means. 2. The striking off or screeding shall conform to the crown and cross section shown on the
plans. I. The top of the forms shall be kept clean from accumulations of concrete, and the travel of the
finishing machine on the forms shall be maintained true without lift, wobbling, or other variations tending to affect precision of finish.
J. When finishing by hand methods, concrete shall be consolidated by use of vibrating units
operating in the concrete. Unless the vibrating apparatus is such that the full width of concrete is consolidated in a single passage, a definite system or pattern shall be used in the operation of the vibrator so the full width of concrete in each linear foot of lane will receive adequate and uniform consolidation. The system and methods of vibrating shall be subject to approval the Engineer. Vibrating equipment shall meet the requirements of IDOT Section 2301.07. Vibrating equipment shall, under no circumstances, be used as a tool for moving concrete laterally on the grade.
3.07 FINISHING
A. Grade and Crown: Promptly after concrete has been placed and vibrated, the surface shall be struck off to the true section by the screed. The surface shall be finished true to crown and grade.
B. Watering the Surface: The practice of lubricating the pavement surface with wet burlap or
by sprinkling water from brushes or from sprinkler containers to afford greater ease in finishing operation shall not be allowed.
C. Floats: Finish surface with wood or magnesium floats; finish from both sides simultaneously
if pavement is placed to full width with one pass of paving machine. D. Straight Edging:
1. After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water has been removed, and while the concrete is still plastic, the slab shall be tested for trueness with a channel radius float, or approval equal. ("channel radius float" is manufactured by Owens Industries, Inc.)
2. The channel radius float shall be held in successive positions parallel to the road center
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 16
line in contact with the surface and the whole area worked from one side of the slab to the other as necessary.
3. Advancement along the pavement shall be in successive stages of not more than one half the length of the channel radius float.
4. Any depressions found shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck off, consolidated, and refinished.
5. Check surface longitudinally while concrete is still plastic; correct any surface deviations greater than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Round edges of pavement to 1/8 inch radius.
E. Surface Treatment:
1. Dragged Surface Treatment: Unless otherwise specified, the finished surface shall be textured with a dragged surface treatment
a. Astroturf or burlap shall be dragged longitudinally over the finished surface to produce a tight, uniform, textured surface, and the edges shall be rounded in a workmanlike manner. b. The Astroturf or burlap drag shall be removed from the pavement surface at regular intervals and cleaned with water to remove accumulated concrete from the fabric in order to maintain a consistent finished texture. c. When, for any reason, the desired texture normally obtained by the drag is not secured, the Engineer may require that the final finish be a broom finish, in lieu of or in addition to the drag.
F. Edge Finish: Before the concrete has taken its initial set, all edges of the slab shall be carefully finished with an edging tool and the pavement shall be left smooth and true to line and grade.
3.08 SURFACE CURING
A. Apply liquid curing compound in a fine spray to form a continuous, uniform film on the horizontal surface and vertical edges of pavement, curbs and back of curbs immediately after surface moisture has disappeared, but no later than 30 minutes after finishing. With approval of the Engineer, the timing of cure application may be adjusted due to varying weather conditions and concrete mix properties to ensure acceptable macrotexture is achieved. 1. Use a white pigment liquid curing compound for concrete not receiving an asphalt
overlay.
B. Apply compound with power sprayer; rate of application not less than 0.067 gallon per square yard (15 square yards per gallon); do not dilute compound.
C. If forms are used, apply to pavement edges and back of curbs within 30 minutes after forms are removed.
D. Protect concrete pavement during cold weather for at least 5 days, or protect a minimum of
24 hours and flexural strength of 500 psi. See Section 7010, 1.07.
3.9 JOINT SEALING
A. Timing:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 17
1. Unless otherwise provided, before any portion of the pavement is opened to the Contractor's forces or to general traffic, joints that require sealing shall be sealed.
B. Cleaning:
1. For those joints that are not to be sealed, cleaning is not required. 2. For those joints that are to be sealed, the residue from sawing shall be removed from the
crack. An air compressor that provides moisture-free and oil-free compressed air shall be used. Removal of wet-sawing residue by flushing with high pressure water may be necessary prior to blowing the crack clean.
3. Joint Sealer: a. Joint sealer shall be prepared and installed in the joint and to the proper level as
shown in the contract documents and as recommended by the manufacturer. b. Hot-poured sealers shall be heated in a thermostatically controlled heating kettle; the
material shall be heated to the temperature required for use, but not above that recommended by the manufacturer. After sealing, excess sealer shall be removed from the pavement surface.
c. Joint sealer shall be placed only when the pavement and ambient air temperatures are 40° or higher. When near this minimum, additional air blasting or drying time or both may be necessary to assure a satisfactory bond to the joint surfaces.
d. Joints shall be sealed the same day they are cleaned. Sealing shall be done only when the joint surfaces appear dry by visual examination.
3.10 FORM REMOVAL
A. Timing: 1. Forms shall not be removed before the initial set of the concrete has taken place. 2. Remove stakes and forms with care to prevent cracking, spalling, or over stressing
concrete. If damage does occur, the minimum repair shall be to saw cut full depth and remove a 4 by 2 1/2 feet wide area, dowel into adjoining sound concrete and pour back full depth; or as required by the Engineer.
3. Clean forms before resetting.
B. Honeycomb Repair:
1. When the side forms are removed, honeycomb shall be filled with mortar composed of 1 part cement and 2 parts fine aggregate by weight.
2. If the honeycombing is to the degree and nature that it is considered by the Engineer as defective work, it shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
C. Paving Protection: The area behind the curbs and slab shall be backfilled immediately after the forms are removed. Dams or other protection shall be constructed to insure that no saturation or erosion of the subgrade under or near the pavement shall occur. This may include check dams, pumping, etc.
3.11 NOT USED 3.12 DEFECTS OR DEFICIENCIES
A. Pavement containing excessive cracks, fractures, spalls, or other defects shall be removed
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 18
and replaced or repaired at no cost to Jurisdiction. Remedy to be determined by Engineer. In lieu of the above, the Engineer may approve an extended warranty.
B. Pavement Thickness Deficiency: See SUDAS Section 7010, 1.08.
3.13 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT
A. Comply with Iowa DOT Section 2510.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723.13 - 1
SECTION 321723.13 - PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symbols, curb markings, light pole bases.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 32 1313 - Concrete Paving.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.
B. FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov; current edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pavement markings shall be only fast dry traffic lane marking paint conforming to Iowa DOT Standard specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Section 4183.03
1. Parking lot striping, direction arrows, light pole bases, sidewalk curbs: White. 2. Handicapped Symbols: White.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 14 days before application of marking materials.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723.13 - 2
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods.
D. Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium
phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the new paint.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.
B. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is
thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts. C. Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown. D. Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve control
points until after markings have been accepted. E. Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings true,
sharp edges and ends. 1. Apply paint in one coat only. 2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum. 3. Length Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 inch. 4. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
F. Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other markings indicated on drawings.
G. Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges and ends, of the design and size indicated.
3.04 DRYING, PROTECTION, AND REPLACEMENT
A. Protect newly painted markings so that paint is not picked up by tires, smeared, or tracked.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS COURT SURFACING 321823 - 1
SECTION 321823 – TENNIS COURT SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. Textured acrylic surfacing for asphalt tennis courts and similar play areas.
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Related Work 1. Asphalt paving
2. Asphalt equipment
B. References
1. National Asphalt Paving Association (NAPA)
2. United States Tennis Association (USTA)
3. International Tennis Federation (ITF)
4. American Sport Builders Association (ASBA)
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Surfacing shall conform to the guidelines of the ASBA for planarity.
B. All surface coatings products shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. C. The contractor shall record the batch number of each product used on the site and maintain it
through the warranty period. D. The contractor shall provide the inspector, upon request, an estimate of the volume of each product
to be used on the site. E. The installer shall be an authorized applicator of the specified system.
F. The manufacturer’s representative shall be available to help resolve material questions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer specifications for components, color chart and installation instructions.
B. Authorized Applicator certificate from the surface system manufacturer. C. ITF classification certificate for the system to be installed.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS COURT SURFACING 321823 - 2
D. Reference list from the installer of at least 5 projects of similar scope done in each of the past 3 years.
E. Current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). F. Product substitution: If other than the product specified, the contractor shall submit at least 7 days
prior to the bid date a complete type written list of proposed substitutions with sufficient data, drawings, samples and literature to demonstrate to the owners satisfaction that the proposed substitution is of equal quality and utility to that originally specified. Information must include a QUV test of at least 1000 hours illustrating the UV stability of the system. The color system shall have an ITF pace rating in Category 2. Under no circumstances will systems from multiple manufacturers be considered.
1.5 MATERIAL HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer specifications and MSDS.
B. Deliver product to the site in original unopened containers with proper labels attached. C. All surfacing materials shall be non-flammable.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Provide a guarantee against defects in the materials and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion.
1.7 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer shall be regularly engaged in construction and surfacing of acrylic tennis courts, play courts or similar surfaces.
B. Installer shall be an Authorized Applicator of the specific surface system. C. Installer shall be a builder member of the ASBA.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. California Products Corp., Andover, MA. 01810 / Plexipave System www.plexipave.com.
B. Substitutions: Submit requests at least 7 days prior to the bid date with a complete type written list of proposed substitutions with sufficient data, drawings, samples and literature to demonstrate to the owner’s satisfaction that the proposed substitution is of equal quality and utility to the specified product. Information must include a QUV test of at least 1000 hours illustrating the UV stability of the system. The system shall have an ITF pace rating in Category 2. Under no circumstance may the final color surface contain silica sand added at the job site.
2.2 SURFACING MATERIALS
A. Patching Mix – for use in patching cracks, holes, depressions and other surface imperfections.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS COURT SURFACING 321823 - 3
C. Acrylic Filler Course – for use as a filler for new or existing asphalt surfaces. The 100% acrylic filler shall be blended with approved silica sand at the job site.
D. Acrylic Color Playing Surface – for use as the finish color and texture. E. Line paint – for use as the line marking on the court/play surface. F. Water – for use in dilution/mixing shall be clean and potable.
2.3 SURFACING MATERIAL SPECIFICATIONS
A. Court Patch Binder – 100% acrylic resin blended with Portland Cement and silica sand. 1. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 46%
2. Weight 8.7-8.9 lbs./gallon
B. Crack Filler – 100% acrylic resin heavily filled with sand.
1. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 85%
2. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 15 lbs./gallon
C. Acrylic Resurfacer – 100% acrylic resin (no vinyl copolymerization constituent). This product shall not
contain not less than 3.5% attapulgite.
1. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 26.7%
2. Weight 8.7-8.9 lbs./gallon D. Acrylic Resin – 100% acrylic resin (no vinyl copolymerization constituent) with selected light fast
pigments. Green shall contain not less than 8% chrome oxide. 1. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 36.5%
2. Weight 10.0-10.2 lbs./gallon
E. Court Surfacer – Plexichrome/Plexipave Color Base – for use as the finish color and texture,
Plexichrome and Plexipave Color Base are blended at the job site to achieve the correct surface texture.
F. Color Base – 100% acrylic resin containing no vinyl copolymerization constituent. Contains not more than 63% rounded silica sand.
1. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 74%
2. Weight 13.1-14.1 lbs./gallon
G. Line paint – 100% acrylic resin containing no alkyds or vinyl constituents. Texturing shall be rounded
silica sand. Lines shall be 2 inches wide white lines. 1. Percent solids by weight (minimum) 60.5%
2. Weight 12-12.3 lbs./gallon
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS COURT SURFACING 321823 - 4
H. All surfacing materials shall be non-flammable and have a VOC content of not less than 100g./ltr. Measured by EPA method 24. 1. Local sands are not acceptable in the color playing surface. Sands must be incorporated at the
manufacturing location to insure quality and stability
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WEATHER LIMITES
A. Do not install when rainfall in imminent or extremely high humidity prevents drying.
B. Do not apply unless surface and air temperature are 50°F and rising.
C. Do not apply if surface temperature is in excess of 140°F.
3.2 PREPARATION FOR ACRYLIC COLOR PLAYING SYSTEM
A. Clean surfaces of loose dirt, oil, grease, leaves, and other debris in strict accordance with manufacturer’s directions. Pressure washing will be necessary to adequately clean areas to be coated. Any areas previously showing algae growth shall be treated with Clorox or approved product to kill the organisms and then be properly rinsed.
B. Holes and cracks: Cracks and holes shall be cleaned and a suitable soil sterilant, as approved by the owner, shall be applied to kill all vegetation 14 days prior to use of Court Patch Binder according to manufacturer's specifications.
C. Depression: Depressions holding enough water to cover a five cent piece shall be filled with Court Patch
Binder Patching Mix. 3 gallons of Court Patch Binder, 100 lbs. 60-80 silica sand, 1 gallon Dry Portland Cement (Type I). This step shall be accomplished prior to the squeegee application of Acrylic Resurfacer. The contractor shall flood all the courts and then allow draining. Define and mark all areas holding enough water to cover a nickel. After defined areas are dry, prime with tack coat mixture of 2 parts water/l part Court Patch Binder. Allow tack coat to dry completely. Spread Court Patch Binder mix true to grade using a straight edge (never a squeegee) for strike off. Steel trowel or wood float the patch so that the texture matches the surrounding area. Never add water to mix. Light misting on surface and edges to feather in is allowed as needed to maintain work ability. Allow to dry thoroughly and cure.
NO WORK FROM THIS STAGE ON SHALL COMMENCE UNTIL AN INSPECTOR HAS ACCEPTED THE SURFACE.
D. Filler Course. (Acrylic Resurfacer): Filler course shall be applied to the clean underlying surface in one application to obtain a total quantity of not less than .06 gallon per square yard based on the material prior to any dilution. Acrylic Resurfacer may be used to pre-coat depression and crack/hole repairs to achieve better planarity prior to filler course application.
1. Over a properly repaired surface of asphalt on existing courts, apply one coat of Acrylic Resurfacer according to the follow mix:
Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water 20-40 gallons Sand 600-800 pounds / 60-80 mesh Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons On new asphalt, two coats of Acrylic Resurfacer shall be used to properly fill all voids in the asphalt surface. Use clean, dry 50-60 mesh sand and clean, potable water to make mixes.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
TENNIS COURT SURFACING 321823 - 5
The quantity of sand and water in the above mix may be adjusted within above limits to complement the roughness and temperature of the surface.
2. Allow the application of Acrylic Resurfacer to dry thoroughly. Scrape off all ridges or rough
spots prior to any subsequent application of Acrylic Resurfacer or subsequent cushion or color surface system.
3.3 APPLICATION OF ACYRLIC COLOR PLAYING SURFACE
A. All areas to be color coated shall be clean, free from sand, clay, grease, dust, salt or other foreign matters. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval, prior to applying any surface treatment.
B. Blend color base and Plexichrome with a mechanical mixer to achieve a uniform Fortified Plexipave mixture. The mix shall be:
Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons
C. Application shall be made by 50 durometer rubber faced squeegees. The Fortified Plexipave mixture should be poured on to the court surface and spread to a uniform thickness in a regular pattern.
D. A total of 2 applications of Fortified Plexipave shall be made until the previous application is thoroughly dry.
3.4 LINE PAINTING
A. Line shall be 2” wide unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Lines shall be carefully laid out in accordance with ASBA and USTA guidelines. The area to be marked shall be taped to insure a crisp line. The Line Paint shall have a texture similar to the surrounding play surface. Application shall be made by a brush or roller at the rate of 150-200 sg./gal. (3/4 gal. per tennis court).
3.5 INSTALLATION OF NET POSTS, NETTING, AND WINDSCREENS
A. Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Erect temporary barriers to protect coatings during drying and curing
B. Lock gates to prevent use until acceptance by owner’s representative.
3.7 CLEAN UP
A. Remove all containers, surplus materials and debris. Dispose of materials in accordance with local, state
and Federal regulations.
B. Leave site in a clean and orderly condition.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 1
SECTION 323113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Chain-link fences. 2. Gates: Swing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 03 Section Cast-in-Place Concrete for cast-in-place concrete equipment bases/pads for gate operators and controls and post footings.
2. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for motor operators, controls, limit and disconnect switches, and safety features and for system disconnect switches.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Lightning Protection System: Maximum grounding-resistance value of 25 ohms under normal dry conditions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates. 1. Gates and hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show accessories, hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances.
C. Qualification Data: For qualified factory-authorized service representative.
D. Product Test Reports: For framing strength.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1. Gate hardware.
G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing fence grounding. Member company of NETA or an NRTL.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single and double swing gate types.
1. Gate Leaf Width: Per Plan 2. Gate Fabric Height: 10’ – 0” and per Plan
B. Pipe and Tubing:
1. Steel pipe produced in accordance with commercial standards. Minimum yield strength of 50,000 psi (344 MPa). Cold formed and welded per ASTM F 1043 Group IC. SS 40™ Fence Framework as manufactured by Allied Tube & Conduit, or approved equal.
2. An outer coat of PVC in accordance with ASTM F 1043, 7.3 in color to match fabric. 3. End and Corner Post 4” od
Line Post 3’ – 6” od Gate Post 4” od Top, Middle, Bottom Rail 1.66” od
C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings.
D. Hardware:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 3
1. Hinges: 360-degree inward and outward swing. 2. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from
both sides of gate. 3. Padlock and Chain: Owner furnished. 4. Lock: Owner furnished. 5. Closer: Manufacturer's standard.
E. Wire Fabric - ASTM A 491 aluminum steel coated steel chain link fabric, 9 gauge, 2” diamond mesh interwoven wire, top selvage end closed, bottom selvage twisted tight.
2.2 FITTINGS (All PVC Coated)
A. Chain link fence fittings per ASTM F 626. All ferrous metal fittings to be galvanized and coated with PVC to match framework and fabric.
B. Post caps: Steel, cast iron or aluminum alloy; must be weatherproof to prevent moisture intrusion into post. Top with arm to be provided when barbed wire is specified. Intermediate or line post tops to have loop for top rail when specified.
C. Rail ends: Formed steel or iron, designed to provide secure connection of top rails to terminate post and brace or other rails to terminal and intermediate posts
D. Sleeves: Lengths of top rails to be connected using 6” (152 mm) sleeves with a .055 minimum wall thickness that allows for expansion or contraction of the rails.
E. Tie Wire: 9 gauge [0.148” (3.76 mm)] galvanized steel or aluminum for attachment of chain link fabric to rails. Hog rings attach fabric to tension wire to be 12-1/2 GA [0.985”(2.502 mm)] steel.
F. Fabric bands and brace bands to be pressed steel.
G. Tension (stretcher) bars to be made of one continuous piece of steel or aluminum, 3/16” x 3/4” (4.76 mm x 19 mm), in the same height as the fence. Provide one bar, per end or gate post and two bars per corner or pull post.
H. Tension wire: Galvanized steel wire, 7 gauge [0.177” (4.5 mm)] core, vinyl coated, having a tensile strength of 75,000 psi (517 MPa).
I. Truss rods & tightened. Rod diameter 5/16” (7.9 mm).
J. Fasteners. All nuts and bolts to be galvanized before color coating.
K. Finish: PVC Coated: Black
2.3 PRIVACY SLATS – Not Used
2.4 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 4
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
2.5 FENCE GROUNDING
A. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.
1. Material above Finished Grade: CopperAluminum. 2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper. 3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire,
terminated with copper ferrules.
B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.
1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type. 2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel, 5/8 by 120 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site clearing, earthwork, pavement work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Stake locations of fence lines, gates, and terminal posts. Do not exceed intervals of 500 feet or line of sight between stakes. Indicate locations of utilities, lawn sprinkler system, underground structures, benchmarks, and property monuments.
3.3 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
3.4 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Fence Grounding: Install at maximum intervals of 1500 feet except as follows:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 5
1. Fences within 100 Feet of Buildings, Structures, Walkways, and Roadways: Ground at maximum intervals of 750 feet.
a. Gates and Other Fence Openings: Ground fence on each side of opening.
1) Bond metal gates to gate posts. 2) Bond across openings, with and without gates, except openings indicated as
intentional fence discontinuities. Use No. 2 AWG wire and bury it at least 18 inches below finished grade.
B. Protection at Crossings of Overhead Electrical Power Lines: Ground fence at location of crossing and at a maximum distance of 150 feet on each side of crossing.
C. Fences Enclosing Electrical Power Distribution Equipment: Ground as required by IEEE C2 unless otherwise indicated.
D. Grounding Method: At each grounding location, drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location, including the following:
E. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.
F. Connections: Make connections to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical
clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration
of moisture to contact surfaces.
G. Bonding to Lightning Protection System: If fence terminates at lightning-protected building or structure, ground the fence and bond the fence grounding conductor to lightning protection down conductor or lightning protection grounding conductor complying with NFPA 780.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Grounding-Resistance Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
1. Grounding-Resistance Tests: Subject completed grounding system to a megger test at each grounding location. Measure grounding resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation, without soil having been moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural grounding resistance. Perform tests by two-point method according to IEEE 81.
2. Excessive Grounding Resistance: If resistance to grounding exceeds specified value, notify Architect promptly. Include recommendations for reducing grounding resistance and a proposal to accomplish recommended work.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 323113 - 6
3. Report: Prepare test reports certified by a testing agency of grounding resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware, gate operator, and other moving parts.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link fences and gates.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 1
SECTION 32 9300 - PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plants. 2. Planting soils.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.
B. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.
C. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
D. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.
E. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.
F. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.
G. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.
H. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.
I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.
J. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.
K. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.
B. Samples of mineral mulch.
C. Product certificates.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.
1. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial.
B. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil-testing laboratory.
1. The soil-testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling. 2. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth.
a. State recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants.
b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals; if present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.
C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver bare-root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare-root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting.
B. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.
C. Handle planting stock by root ball.
D. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F (16 to 18 deg C) until planting.
E. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 3
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.
b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over.
2. Warranty Periods from Date of Planting Completion:
a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. c. Annuals: Three months.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below.
1. Maintenance Period for Trees and Shrubs: Three months from date of planting completion. 2. Maintenance Period for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Three months from date of planting
completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLANT MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.
C. Annuals and Biennials: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or listed, with well-established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery and that are in bud but not yet in bloom.
2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 4
1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.
B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.
C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.
D. Aluminum Sulfate: Commercial grade, unadulterated.
E. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.
F. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.
G. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials.
H. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight.
I. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight.
2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:
B. Sphagnum Peat: Partially decomposed sphagnum peat moss, finely divided or granular texture, with a pH range of 3.4 to 4.8.
C. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent.
D. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
E. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or cattle manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.
2.4 FERTILIZERS
A. Bonemeal: Commercial, raw or steamed, finely ground; a minimum of 4 percent nitrogen and 20 percent phosphoric acid.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 5
B. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.
C. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.45 kg/92.9 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.
D. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.
E. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial-grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots.
1. Size: 10-gram tablets. 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by
weight plus micronutrients.
2.5 PLANTING SOILS
1. Planting Soil: Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 5 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
2. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site and supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quantities are insufficient. Verify suitability of stockpiled surface soil to produce topsoil.
3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources.
A. Verify suitability of soil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix soil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil:
1. Ratio of Loose Compost to Topsoil by Volume: 1:3. 2. Weight of Lime, Sulfur, Iron Sulfate Aluminum Sulfate, Agricultural Gypsum as required by soil
analysis. 3. Weight of Bonemeal per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 50lbs 4. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 50lbs 5. Weight of Slow-Release Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft. (92.9 Sq. m): 50lbs
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 6
2.6 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Cedar Natural Mulch
B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of [2 to 5] <Insert range or value> decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings.
C. Mineral Mulch: Rounded riverbed gravel or smooth-faced stone.
1. Size Range: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) maximum, 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum 2. Color: Uniform tan-beige color range acceptable to Architect 3. Shall be placed on top of landscape fabric.
2.7 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS
A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. (101g/sq. m) minimum.
2.8 PESTICIDES
A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT
A. Loosen subgrade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading or spread topsoil, apply soil amendments
and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. 3. Spread planting soil to a depth of 12 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after
natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.
3.2 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS
A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 7
disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Excavate at least 12 inches (300 mm) wider than root spread and deep enough to accommodate
vertical roots for bare-root stock. 3. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of
the root ball.
B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may be used as planting soil, if meets requirements stated above.
3.3 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING
A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1.
B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.
C. Set stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch (25 mm) above finish grades.
1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Balled and Burlapped: After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut
and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
3. Balled and Potted & Container-Grown: Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
4. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Carefully remove root ball from fabric bag without damaging root ball or plant. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.
5. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.
6. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.
7. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
D. Bare-Root Stock: Set and support bare-root stock in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grade.
1. Use planting soil for backfill. 2. Spread roots without tangling or turning toward surface, and carefully work backfill around roots by
hand. Puddle with water until backfill layers are completely saturated. Plumb before backfilling, and maintain plumb while working backfill around roots and placing layers above roots.
3. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place tablets beside soil-covered roots about 1 inch (25 mm) from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole or touching the roots.
4. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 8
E. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.
3.4 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING
A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape.
B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.
3.5 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING
A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing.
B. Use planting soil for backfill.
C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots.
D. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water.
E. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil.
F. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock.
3.6 PLANTING AREA MULCHING
A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.
1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply organic mulch ring of 3-inch (75-mm) average thickness, with 6’ diameter radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches (75 mm) of trunks or stems.
2. Organic Mulch in Perennial and Grass Areas: Apply 2-inch (50-mm) average thickness of mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 2 inches of trunks or stems.
3.7 PLANT MAINTENANCE
A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.
B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
PLANTS 32 9300 - 9
C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use practices to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.
D. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.
E. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 1
SECTION 334100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.
B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.
C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written permission.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Reinforced-Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76.
1. Joints shall be tongue and groove without o-rings, unless otherwise noted on plans.
2. Class III, Wall B
3. Tongue and groove joints shall be wrapped in sections of 18” wide engineering fabric, with 12” overlap between fabric sheets.
B. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (PEP) shall be corrugated with integrally formed smooth interior meeting the requirements of AASHTO M294, Type S and ASTM F667. Depth of cover up to 12’ conforming to ASTM C76 or AASHTO M170.
2.2 MANHOLES
A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:
1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.
2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section as
required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness for walls and
base riser section, and separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated, and top
of cone of size that matches grade rings. 7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe
connection. 9. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder Individual FRP steps; FRP ladder; or
ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP ASTM A 615/A 615M, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods encased in ASTM D 4101, PP, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches.
10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and of height required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover, and height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.
B. NyloPlast –Traffic and Non-Traffic related
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 3
C. Manhole Frames and Covers:
1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser with 4-inch-minimum width flange and 26-inch-diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER."
2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 35 gray iron unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 CONCRETE
A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.
B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.
1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.
a. Invert Slope: 2 percent through manhole.
2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.
a. Slope: 8 percent.
D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.
A. Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards.
B. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 4
C. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates.
D. Frames and Grates: Heavy duty, according to utility standards.
2.5 PIPE OUTLETS
A. Head Walls: Cast-in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides.
B. Flared End Sections: (RCP) Reinforced Concrete Pipe: shall conform to ASTM C76, with a strength of Class III and a B Wall. Unless otherwise noted, tongue and groove joints without o-rings. Provide pipe guards. LIftholes will be allowed.
C. Flared End Section: (HDPE) High Density Polyethylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EARTHWORK
A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Sections.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.
C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.
D. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following:
1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow.
3.3 MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.
B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.
C. Where specific manhole construction is not indicated, follow manhole manufacturer's written instructions.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 5
D. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION
A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated.
B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated.
C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated.
D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated.
E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated.
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Sections. Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures.
1. Use warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.
1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:
a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size
not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.
3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.
4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.
B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance
notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001 TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100 - 6
5. Gravity-Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI-B-6, and the following:
a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. c. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924.
C. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to OWNER.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with water.
END OF SECTION
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 1
SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Perforated-wall pipe and fittings. 2. Geotextile filter fabrics.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings:
1. Rigid, type S in accordance with AASHTO M 252 and M-294. Material shall be Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. N-12 Smooth Interior corrugated polyethylene pipe or approved equivalent (perforated).
2. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.
2.2 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Fill."
2.3 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS
A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM D 4491.
B. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 2
1. Survivability: AASHTO M 288 Class 2. 2. Styles: Flat and sock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and areas for suitable conditions where subdrainage systems are to be installed.
B. If subdrainage is required for landscaping, locate and mark existing utilities, underground structures, and aboveground obstructions before beginning installation and avoid disruption and damage of services.
C. Verify that drainage panels installed as part of foundation wall waterproofing is properly positioned to drain into subdrainage system.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EARTHWORK
A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Fill."
3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated.
1. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 2. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and
with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.
B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Install thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2321.
3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join perforated PE pipe and fittings with couplings according to ASTM D 3212 with loose banded, coupled, or push-on joints.
3.5 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
COLLEGE COMMUNITY SCHOOL DISTRICT PROJECT NO. 14277001
TENNIS COURTS AND PARKING LOT EXPANSION
CEDAR RAPIDS, IOWA
SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 3
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping. Comply with requirements for underground warning tapes specified in specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."
1. Install PE warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Install detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling.
2. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.
B. Drain piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
D. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to College Community School District.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.
